Irish Curriculum
In Ireland, school is mandatory from six until sixteen, or until three years of at the second level are complete. There are several types of schools in the country: state funded (which can be religious, non-religious, multi-religious or Irish medium), special, or private. Many of the state funded schools are under some sort of religious control, which means that religion can be a factor in a child’s admittance. Classes consist of English language courses, Irish, math, science, arts, and physical education. Students then move on to secondary school. The junior cycle is mandatory, and consists of a broad curriculum. At the end of the third year, but not before the age of fourteen, students take the Junior Certificate Exam, which includes about ten subjects. From there, students can choose to move on to the senior cycle, which lasts another three years, after which students are administered the Leaving Certificate Exam.
Continuing Excellence
Irish students tend to rank above average in academic performance. We can help continue this trend. With our online math classes and English, students can study their course material outside of the classroom. They can work on current lessons, review old lessons and even work ahead. We also provide assistance to teachers by supplying them with extra worksheets to supplement their lessons.
We are not just a program to help struggling students; we can also provide an extra challenge to those that are excelling above and beyond traditional standards. Students and teachers can try thirty days of free online classes, where we can prove that we can give above average students the boost to keep learning.
Mathematics
- Junior Infants - Age 4 Mathematics
- Senior Infants - Age 5 Mathematics
- First Class - Primary Mathematics
- Second Class - Primary Mathematics
- Third Class - Primary Mathematics
- Fourth Class - Primary Mathematics
- Fifth Class - Primary Mathematics
- Sixth Class - Primary Mathematics
- Jnr Cert Foundation 1st Year Mathematics
- Jnr Cert Ordinary 1st Year Mathematics
- Jnr Cert Higher 1st Year Mathematics
- Jnr Cert Foundation 2nd Year Mathematics
- Jnr Cert Ordinary 2nd Year Mathematics
- Jnr Cert Higher 2nd Year Mathematics
- Jnr Cert Foundation 3rd Year Mathematics
- Jnr Cert Ordinary 3rd Year Mathematics
- Jnr Cert Higher 3rd Year Mathematics
- Leaving Cert Foundation 5th Year Mathematics
- Leaving Cert Ordinary 5th Year Mathematics
- Leaving Cert Higher 5th Year Mathematics
Junior Infants - Age 4 Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Junior Infants | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Using and applying number | The numbers 1 to 5 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write and identify the words and numerals for the numbers 1 to 5 | |||
| 3 | Using and applying number | The numbers 6 to 9 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match cardinal words and numbers with groups of 6-9 objects. | |||
| 4 | The number system | Ordinal numbers 1 to 9 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match ordinal words and numbers with groups of 1-9 objects. | |||
| 5 | Using and applying number | Zero and counting numbers 1 to 9 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero. | |||
| 6 | Using and applying number | The number 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number. | |||
| 7 | Using and applying number | Numbers 11 to 20 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the numbers 11 to 20, count up to 20 and match a group of objects to the correct number. | |||
| 8 | Exam | Exam – Junior Infants | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Senior Infants - Age 5 Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Senior Infants | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Using and applying number | The numbers 1 to 5 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write and identify the words and numerals for the numbers 1 to 5 | |||
| 3 | Using and applying number | The numbers 6 to 9 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match cardinal words and numbers with groups of 6-9 objects. | |||
| 4 | The number system | Ordinal numbers 1 to 9 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match ordinal words and numbers with groups of 1-9 objects. | |||
| 5 | Using and applying number | Zero and counting numbers 1 to 9 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero. | |||
| 6 | Using and applying number | The number 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number. | |||
| 7 | Using and applying number | Numbers 11 to 20 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the numbers 11 to 20, count up to 20 and match a group of objects to the correct number. | |||
| 8 | Exam | Exam – Senior Infants | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
First Class - Primary Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – First Class | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Using and applying number | The numbers 1 to 5 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write and identify the words and numerals for the numbers 1 to 5 | |||
| 3 | Using and applying number | The numbers 6 to 9 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match cardinal words and numbers with groups of 6-9 objects. | |||
| 4 | The number system | Ordinal numbers 1 to 9 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match ordinal words and numbers with groups of 1-9 objects. | |||
| 5 | Using and applying number | Zero and counting numbers 1 to 9 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero. | |||
| 6 | Using and applying number | The number 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number. | |||
| 7 | Using and applying number | Numbers 11 to 20 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the numbers 11 to 20, count up to 20 and match a group of objects to the correct number. | |||
| 8 | Using and applying number | Using place value to order numbers up to 20 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to order numbers up to the value of 20. | |||
| 9 | Reasoning | Simple addition up to the number 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number. | |||
| 10 | Reasoning | Simple addition up to the number 20 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20. | |||
| 11 | Calculations | Subtraction up to the number 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10. | |||
| 12 | Calculation sharing/division | Strategies for division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them. | |||
| 13 | Calculation-multiples | Multiples of 10 up to 100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write, rename and add multiples of ten. | |||
| 14 | Calculations | The numbers 20 to 99 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine. | |||
| 15 | Calculation 10-100 | Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten. | |||
| 16 | Calculation-larger numbers | The numbers 100 to 999 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999. | |||
| 17 | Place value | The numbers 1000 to 9999 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999. | |||
| 18 | Length | Compare length by using informal units of measurement | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object. | |||
| 19 | Weight/mass | Introducing the concept of mass | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass. | |||
| 20 | Time, months | Months and seasons of the year | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season. | |||
| 21 | Time, days of week | Days of the week | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name the days of the week in order, recognise them in a written form, be able to answer questions about the days of the week, and have an understanding of a diary. | |||
| 22 | Time, duration | Duration | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units. | |||
| 23 | Time, minutes | Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock. | |||
| 24 | 3-D shapes | Viewing 3-D shapes. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles. | |||
| 25 | Calculations | Subtraction by Comparison | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods. | |||
| 26 | Calculations | Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences. | |||
| 27 | Calculation-grouping | Multiplication using equal groups | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them. | |||
| 28 | Calculation-grouping | Multiplication using repeated addition | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them. | |||
| 29 | Exam | Exam – First Class | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Second Class - Primary Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Second Class | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Using and applying number | The numbers 1 to 5 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write and identify the words and numerals for the numbers 1 to 5 | |||
| 3 | Using and applying number | The numbers 6 to 9 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match cardinal words and numbers with groups of 6-9 objects. | |||
| 4 | The number system | Ordinal numbers 1 to 9 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match ordinal words and numbers with groups of 1-9 objects. | |||
| 5 | Using and applying number | Zero and counting numbers 1 to 9 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero. | |||
| 6 | Using and applying number | The number 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number. | |||
| 7 | Using and applying number | Numbers 11 to 20 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the numbers 11 to 20, count up to 20 and match a group of objects to the correct number. | |||
| 8 | Using and applying number | Using place value to order numbers up to 20 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to order numbers up to the value of 20. | |||
| 9 | Reasoning | Simple addition up to the number 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number. | |||
| 10 | Reasoning | Simple addition up to the number 20 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20. | |||
| 11 | Calculations | Subtraction up to the number 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10. | |||
| 12 | Calculations | Subtraction by Comparison | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods. | |||
| 13 | Calculations | Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences. | |||
| 14 | Calculation-grouping | Multiplication using equal groups | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them. | |||
| 15 | Calculation-grouping | Multiplication using repeated addition | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them. | |||
| 16 | Calculation-multiplication | The multiplication sign | |
| Objective: on completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply single numbers to solve multiplication problems. | |||
| 17 | Calculation sharing/division | Strategies for division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them. | |||
| 18 | Calculation-multiples | Multiples of 10 up to 100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write, rename and add multiples of ten. | |||
| 19 | Calculations | The numbers 20 to 99 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine. | |||
| 20 | Calculation 10-100 | Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten. | |||
| 21 | Calculation-larger numbers | The numbers 100 to 999 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999. | |||
| 22 | Addition | Addition to 99 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99. | |||
| 23 | Subtraction | Subtraction up to the number 99 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences. | |||
| 24 | Multiplication | Multiplication – important facts. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences. | |||
| 25 | Place value | The numbers 1000 to 9999 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999. | |||
| 26 | Addition | Addition up to the number 999 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers. | |||
| 27 | Length | Compare length by using informal units of measurement | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object. | |||
| 28 | Length | Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres. | |||
| 29 | Length | Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres. | |||
| 30 | Length | Compare and convert formal units of measurement | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert. | |||
| 31 | 3-D shapes | Constructing models. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms. | |||
| 32 | Capacity | Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity. | |||
| 33 | Capacity | Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it. | |||
| 34 | Weight/mass | Introducing the concept of mass | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass. | |||
| 35 | Weight/mass | The kilogram | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales. | |||
| 36 | Weight/mass | The gram and net mass | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams. | |||
| 37 | Weight/mass | The tonne – converting units and problems | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another. | |||
| 38 | Decimals | Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places. | |||
| 39 | Time, months | Months and seasons of the year | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season. | |||
| 40 | Time, days of week | Days of the week | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name the days of the week in order, recognise them in a written form, be able to answer questions about the days of the week, and have an understanding of a diary. | |||
| 41 | Time, duration | Duration | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units. | |||
| 42 | Time, minutes | Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock. | |||
| 43 | Time, units | Units of time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars. | |||
| 44 | 2-D shapes | Using the prefix to determine polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides. | |||
| 45 | 2-D shapes | Spatial properties of quadrilaterals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals. | |||
| 46 | Angles | Measure and classify angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle. | |||
| 47 | 3-D shapes | Viewing 3-D shapes. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles. | |||
| 48 | Data | Pictograms | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs. | |||
| 49 | Data | Bar Charts | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs. | |||
| 50 | Data | Pie and bar graphs. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs. | |||
| 51 | Exam | Exam – Second Class | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Third Class - Primary Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Third Class | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Calculation-multiplication | The multiplication sign | |
| Objective: on completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply single numbers to solve multiplication problems. | |||
| 3 | Calculation sharing/division | Strategies for division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them. | |||
| 4 | Calculation-multiples | Multiples of 10 up to 100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write, rename and add multiples of ten. | |||
| 5 | Subtraction | Subtraction with borrowing | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method | |||
| 6 | Subtraction | Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct. | |||
| 7 | Multiplication | Multiplication – important facts. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences. | |||
| 8 | Multiplication | Multiples and factors of whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers. | |||
| 9 | Addition | Addition up to the number 999 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers. | |||
| 10 | Subtraction | Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers. | |||
| 11 | Division | Division with and without a remainder. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder. | |||
| 12 | Subtraction | Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers. | |||
| 13 | Length | Compare length by using informal units of measurement | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object. | |||
| 14 | Length | Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres. | |||
| 15 | Length | Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres. | |||
| 16 | Length | Compare and convert formal units of measurement | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert. | |||
| 17 | Area | Introduction to the square centimetre. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly. | |||
| 18 | 3-D shapes | Constructing models. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms. | |||
| 19 | Capacity | Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity. | |||
| 20 | Capacity | Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape. | |||
| 21 | Capacity | Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it. | |||
| 22 | Weight/mass | Introducing the concept of mass | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass. | |||
| 23 | Weight/mass | The kilogram | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales. | |||
| 24 | Weight/mass | The gram and net mass | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams. | |||
| 25 | Weight/mass | The tonne – converting units and problems | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another. | |||
| 26 | Fractions | Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole. | |||
| 27 | Fractions | Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects. | |||
| 28 | Decimals | Introduction to decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places. | |||
| 29 | Decimals | Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places. | |||
| 30 | Time, days of week | Days of the week | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name the days of the week in order, recognise them in a written form, be able to answer questions about the days of the week, and have an understanding of a diary. | |||
| 31 | Time, duration | Duration | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units. | |||
| 32 | Time, minutes | Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock. | |||
| 33 | Time, units | Units of time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars. | |||
| 34 | Time, a.m. p.m. | AM and PM time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time. | |||
| 35 | Time, quarter to, past | Quarter past and quarter to | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’. | |||
| 36 | Time, minutes past the hour | Minutes past | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock. | |||
| 37 | Time, minutes to the hour | Minutes to | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock. | |||
| 38 | Time, digital, analogue | Comparing analogue and digital time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks. | |||
| 39 | Time, digital | O’clock and half past using digital time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock. | |||
| 40 | Time, analogue | O’clock and half past on the analogue clock | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock. | |||
| 41 | Time, 24-hour | 24 hour time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time. | |||
| 42 | 2-D shapes | Using the prefix to determine polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides. | |||
| 43 | 2-D shapes | Spatial properties of quadrilaterals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals. | |||
| 44 | Angles | Measure and classify angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle. | |||
| 45 | Data | Pictograms | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs. | |||
| 46 | Data | Bar Charts | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs. | |||
| 47 | Data | Line graphs. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs. | |||
| 48 | Data | Pie and bar graphs. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs. | |||
| 49 | Money | Problems involving money | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money. | |||
| 50 | Exam | Exam – Third Class | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Fourth Class - Primary Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Fourth Class | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Subtraction | Subtraction with borrowing | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method | |||
| 3 | Subtraction | Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct. | |||
| 4 | Multiplication | Multiplication – important facts. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences. | |||
| 5 | Multiplication | Multiples and factors of whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers. | |||
| 6 | Problems | Solve and record division using known facts and sharing | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems. | |||
| 7 | Subtraction | Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers. | |||
| 8 | Multiplication | Multiplication using extended algorithms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms. | |||
| 9 | Division | Division with and without a remainder. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder. | |||
| 10 | Division | Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number. | |||
| 11 | Counting and numeration | The numbers 10 000 to 99 999 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers. | |||
| 12 | Counting and numeration | Addition to 9999 and beyond | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems. | |||
| 13 | Subtraction | Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers. | |||
| 14 | Multiplication | Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form. | |||
| 15 | Division | Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction. | |||
| 16 | Length | Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres. | |||
| 17 | Length | Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres. | |||
| 18 | Length | Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map. | |||
| 19 | Length | Compare and convert formal units of measurement | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert. | |||
| 20 | Area | Introduction to the square centimetre. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly. | |||
| 21 | 3-D shapes | Constructing models. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms. | |||
| 22 | Capacity | Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity. | |||
| 23 | Capacity | Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape. | |||
| 24 | Capacity | The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre. | |||
| 25 | Capacity | Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity. | |||
| 26 | Capacity | Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it. | |||
| 27 | Weight/mass | The kilogram | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales. | |||
| 28 | Weight/mass | The gram and net mass | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams. | |||
| 29 | Weight/mass | The tonne – converting units and problems | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another. | |||
| 30 | Area | Comparing and ordering areas. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area. | |||
| 31 | Fractions | Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole. | |||
| 32 | Fractions | Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects. | |||
| 33 | Fractions | Comparing and ordering fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts. | |||
| 34 | Fractions | mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one. | |||
| 35 | Decimals | Introduction to decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places. | |||
| 36 | Decimals | Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places. | |||
| 37 | Decimals | Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals. | |||
| 38 | Decimals | Adding decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 39 | Time, duration | Duration | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units. | |||
| 40 | Time, minutes | Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock. | |||
| 41 | Time, units | Units of time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars. | |||
| 42 | Time, a.m. p.m. | AM and PM time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time. | |||
| 43 | Time, analogue | O’clock and half past on the analogue clock | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock. | |||
| 44 | Time, quarter to, past | Quarter past and quarter to | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’. | |||
| 45 | Time, minutes past the hour | Minutes past | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock. | |||
| 46 | Time, minutes to the hour | Minutes to | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock. | |||
| 47 | Time, digital, analogue | Comparing analogue and digital time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks. | |||
| 48 | Time, digital | O’clock and half past using digital time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock. | |||
| 49 | Time, 24-hour | 24 hour time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time. | |||
| 50 | 2-D shapes | Using the prefix to determine polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides. | |||
| 51 | 2-D shapes | Spatial properties of quadrilaterals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals. | |||
| 52 | Angles | Measure and classify angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle. | |||
| 53 | Data | Pictograms | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs. | |||
| 54 | Data | Bar Charts | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs. | |||
| 55 | Data | Line graphs. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs. | |||
| 56 | Data | Pie and bar graphs. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs. | |||
| 57 | Multiplication | Multiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication. | |||
| 58 | Multiplication | Multiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication. | |||
| 59 | Multiplication | Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number. | |||
| 60 | Sign word problems | Solving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division. | |||
| 61 | Money | Problems involving money | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money. | |||
| 62 | Exam | Exam – Fourth Class | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Fifth Class - Primary Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Fifth Class | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Subtraction | Subtraction with borrowing | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method | |||
| 3 | Subtraction | Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct. | |||
| 4 | Multiplication | Multiplication – important facts. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences. | |||
| 5 | Multiplication | Multiples and factors of whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers. | |||
| 6 | Problems | Solve and record division using known facts and sharing | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems. | |||
| 7 | Multiplication | Multiplication using extended algorithms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms. | |||
| 8 | Division | Division with and without a remainder. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder. | |||
| 9 | Counting and numeration | The numbers 10 000 to 99 999 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers. | |||
| 10 | Counting and numeration | Addition to 9999 and beyond | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems. | |||
| 11 | Subtraction | Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers. | |||
| 12 | Counting and numeration | Seven digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers. | |||
| 13 | Multiplication | Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form. | |||
| 14 | Division | Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction. | |||
| 15 | Length | Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres. | |||
| 16 | Length | Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres. | |||
| 17 | Length | Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map. | |||
| 18 | Length | Compare and convert formal units of measurement | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert. | |||
| 19 | Area | Introduction to the square centimetre. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly. | |||
| 20 | Area | Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides. | |||
| 21 | 3-D shapes | Constructing models. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms. | |||
| 22 | Capacity | Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity. | |||
| 23 | Capacity | Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape. | |||
| 24 | Capacity | The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre. | |||
| 25 | Capacity | Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity. | |||
| 26 | Capacity | Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it. | |||
| 27 | Capacity | Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity. | |||
| 28 | Weight/mass | The kilogram | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales. | |||
| 29 | Weight/mass | The gram and net mass | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams. | |||
| 30 | Weight/mass | The tonne – converting units and problems | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another. | |||
| 31 | Area | Comparing and ordering areas. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area. | |||
| 32 | Fractions | Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole. | |||
| 33 | Fractions | Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects. | |||
| 34 | Fractions | Comparing and ordering fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts. | |||
| 35 | Fractions | mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one. | |||
| 36 | Rules properties | Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions. | |||
| 37 | Decimals | Introduction to decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places. | |||
| 38 | Decimals | Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places. | |||
| 39 | Decimals | Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals. | |||
| 40 | Decimals | Adding decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 41 | Time, duration | Duration | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units. | |||
| 42 | Time, minutes | Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock. | |||
| 43 | Time, units | Units of time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars. | |||
| 44 | Time, a.m. p.m. | AM and PM time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time. | |||
| 45 | Time, analogue | O’clock and half past on the analogue clock | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock. | |||
| 46 | Time, quarter to, past | Quarter past and quarter to | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’. | |||
| 47 | Time, minutes past the hour | Minutes past | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock. | |||
| 48 | Time, minutes to the hour | Minutes to | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock. | |||
| 49 | Time, digital, analogue | Comparing analogue and digital time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks. | |||
| 50 | Time, digital | O’clock and half past using digital time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock. | |||
| 51 | Time, 24-hour | 24 hour time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time. | |||
| 52 | Time zones | Time zones | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions. | |||
| 53 | Time, distance, speed | Average speed | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object. | |||
| 54 | 2-D shapes | Using the prefix to determine polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides. | |||
| 55 | Angles | Measure and classify angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle. | |||
| 56 | 2-D shapes | Recognise and name triangles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties. | |||
| 57 | Tessellating 2-D shapes | Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate. | |||
| 58 | 3-D shapes | Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties. | |||
| 59 | 3-D shapes | Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties. | |||
| 60 | 3-D shapes | Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones. | |||
| 61 | Lines and angles | Describing position. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position. | |||
| 62 | Lines and angles | Mapping and grid references | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places. | |||
| 63 | Lines and angles | Main and intermediate compass points | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location. | |||
| 64 | Lines and angles | Informal coordinate system | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper. | |||
| 65 | Data | Pictograms | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs. | |||
| 66 | Data | Bar Charts | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs. | |||
| 67 | Data | Line graphs. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs. | |||
| 68 | Data | Pie and bar graphs. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs. | |||
| 69 | Multiplication | Multiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication. | |||
| 70 | Multiplication | Multiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication. | |||
| 71 | Multiplication | Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number. | |||
| 72 | Multiplication | Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 3-digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 4 digit numbers by any 3 digit numbers using long multiplication. | |||
| 73 | Sign word problems | Solving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division. | |||
| 74 | Equations | Problem solving strategies | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems. | |||
| 75 | Number problems | Problems with numbers. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy. | |||
| 76 | Money | Problems involving money | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money. | |||
| 77 | Volume/capacity | Problems with volume/capacity. | |
| Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity | |||
| 78 | Exam | Exam – Fifth Class | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Sixth Class - Primary Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Sixth Class | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Subtraction | Subtraction with borrowing | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method | |||
| 3 | Subtraction | Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct. | |||
| 4 | Multiplication | Multiplication – important facts. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences. | |||
| 5 | Multiplication | Multiples and factors of whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers. | |||
| 6 | Problems | Solve and record division using known facts and sharing | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems. | |||
| 7 | Subtraction | Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers. | |||
| 8 | Multiplication | Multiplication using extended algorithms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms. | |||
| 9 | Division | Division with and without a remainder. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder. | |||
| 10 | Division | Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number. | |||
| 11 | Counting and numeration | The numbers 10 000 to 99 999 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers. | |||
| 12 | Counting and numeration | Addition to 9999 and beyond | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems. | |||
| 13 | Subtraction | Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers. | |||
| 14 | Counting and numeration | Seven digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers. | |||
| 15 | Multiplication | Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form. | |||
| 16 | Division | Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction. | |||
| 17 | Length | Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres. | |||
| 18 | Length | Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres. | |||
| 19 | Length | Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map. | |||
| 20 | Length | Compare and convert formal units of measurement | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert. | |||
| 21 | Area | Introduction to the square centimetre. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly. | |||
| 22 | Area | Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides. | |||
| 23 | Area | Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas. | |||
| 24 | 3-D shapes | Constructing models. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms. | |||
| 25 | Capacity | Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity. | |||
| 26 | Capacity | Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape. | |||
| 27 | Capacity | The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre. | |||
| 28 | Capacity | Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity. | |||
| 29 | Capacity | Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it. | |||
| 30 | Capacity | Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity. | |||
| 31 | Weight/mass | Introducing the concept of mass | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass. | |||
| 32 | Weight/mass | The kilogram | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales. | |||
| 33 | Weight/mass | The gram and net mass | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams. | |||
| 34 | Weight/mass | The tonne – converting units and problems | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another. | |||
| 35 | Area | Comparing and ordering areas. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area. | |||
| 36 | Fractions | Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole. | |||
| 37 | Fractions | Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects. | |||
| 38 | Fractions | Comparing and ordering fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts. | |||
| 39 | Fractions | mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one. | |||
| 40 | Rules properties | Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions. | |||
| 41 | Decimals | Introduction to decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places. | |||
| 42 | Decimals | Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places. | |||
| 43 | Decimals | Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals. | |||
| 44 | Decimals | Adding decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 45 | Time, duration | Duration | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units. | |||
| 46 | Time, minutes | Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock. | |||
| 47 | Time, units | Units of time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars. | |||
| 48 | Time, a.m. p.m. | AM and PM time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time. | |||
| 49 | Time, analogue | O’clock and half past on the analogue clock | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock. | |||
| 50 | Time, quarter to, past | Quarter past and quarter to | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’. | |||
| 51 | Time, minutes past the hour | Minutes past | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock. | |||
| 52 | Time, minutes to the hour | Minutes to | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock. | |||
| 53 | Time, digital, analogue | Comparing analogue and digital time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks. | |||
| 54 | Time, digital | O’clock and half past using digital time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock. | |||
| 55 | Time, 24-hour | 24 hour time | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time. | |||
| 56 | Time zones | Time zones | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions. | |||
| 57 | Time, distance, speed | Average speed | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object. | |||
| 58 | 2-D shapes | Using the prefix to determine polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides. | |||
| 59 | Angles | Measure and classify angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle. | |||
| 60 | 2-D shapes | Recognise and name triangles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties. | |||
| 61 | Tessellating 2-D shapes | Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate. | |||
| 62 | 3-D shapes | Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties. | |||
| 63 | 3-D shapes | Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties. | |||
| 64 | 3-D shapes | Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones. | |||
| 65 | Lines and angles | Describing position. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position. | |||
| 66 | Lines and angles | Mapping and grid references | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places. | |||
| 67 | Lines and angles | Main and intermediate compass points | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location. | |||
| 68 | Lines and angles | Informal coordinate system | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper. | |||
| 69 | Data | Pictograms | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs. | |||
| 70 | Data | Bar Charts | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs. | |||
| 71 | Data | Line graphs. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs. | |||
| 72 | Data | Pie and bar graphs. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs. | |||
| 73 | Multiplication | Multiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication. | |||
| 74 | Multiplication | Multiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication. | |||
| 75 | Multiplication | Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number. | |||
| 76 | Multiplication | Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 3-digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 4 digit numbers by any 3 digit numbers using long multiplication. | |||
| 77 | Multiplication | Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 4-digit number | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to be able to multiply any 4 digit number by any other 4 digit number using long multiplication. | |||
| 78 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20 with no remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20. | |||
| 79 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with no remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 and no remainders. | |||
| 80 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 2, 3 and 4 with divisors greater than 20 with no remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 2,3,4 where divisors are greater than 20 and there are no remainders. | |||
| 81 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2 and 3 with divisors less than 20 with remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2,3 where the divisors are less than 20 and there are remainders. | |||
| 82 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 where the divisors are greater than 12 and less than 20, and the dividend is any 3 digit number, and there are remainders. | |||
| 83 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 with remainders as fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 and remainders expressed as fractions | |||
| 84 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35 with some remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35, with some remainders. | |||
| 85 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 with dividends of 3 and 4-digits with some remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 and where dividends are 3 and 4 digit numbers, and there are some remainders. | |||
| 86 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 with dividends of thousands and some remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to use Long Division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 including division of thousands, and some remainders. | |||
| 87 | Division/repeat subtraction | Using divide, multiply and subtraction in the bring down method | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use Long Division using the Divide, Multiply, Subtract and Bring Down method. | |||
| 88 | Sign word problems | Solving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division. | |||
| 89 | Equations | Problem solving strategies | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems. | |||
| 90 | Number problems | Problems with numbers. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy. | |||
| 91 | Money | Problems involving money | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money. | |||
| 92 | Length | Problems with length. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length. | |||
| 93 | Mass | Problems with mass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass. | |||
| 94 | Area | Problems with area. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area. | |||
| 95 | Exam | Exam – Sixth Class | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Jnr Cert Foundation 1st Year Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Jnr Cert Foundation 1st Year | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Subtraction | Subtraction with borrowing | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method | |||
| 3 | Subtraction | Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct. | |||
| 4 | Multiplication | Multiplication – important facts. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences. | |||
| 5 | Multiplication | Multiples and factors of whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers. | |||
| 6 | Problems | Solve and record division using known facts and sharing | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems. | |||
| 7 | Multiplication | Multiplication using extended algorithms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms. | |||
| 8 | Division | Division with and without a remainder. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder. | |||
| 9 | Counting and numeration | Addition to 9999 and beyond | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems. | |||
| 10 | Subtraction | Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers. | |||
| 11 | Counting and numeration | Seven digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers. | |||
| 12 | Multiplication | Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form. | |||
| 13 | Division | Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction. | |||
| 14 | Length | Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres. | |||
| 15 | Length | Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map. | |||
| 16 | Length | Compare and convert formal units of measurement | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert. | |||
| 17 | Area | Introduction to the square centimetre. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly. | |||
| 18 | Area | Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides. | |||
| 19 | Fractions | Comparing and ordering fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts. | |||
| 20 | Fractions | mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one. | |||
| 21 | Fractions | Improper fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally. | |||
| 22 | Fractions | Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100. | |||
| 23 | Fractions | Finding equivalent fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines. | |||
| 24 | Fractions | Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form. | |||
| 25 | Fractions | Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor. | |||
| 26 | Fractions | Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one. | |||
| 27 | Fractions | Subtracting fractions from whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from | |||
| 28 | Fractions | Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions with the same denominator. | |||
| 29 | Fractions | Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other. | |||
| 30 | Rules properties | Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions. | |||
| 31 | Decimals | Introduction to decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places. | |||
| 32 | Multiplication | Multiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication. | |||
| 33 | Multiplication | Multiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication. | |||
| 34 | Multiplication | Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number. | |||
| 35 | Multiplication | Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 3-digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 4 digit numbers by any 3 digit numbers using long multiplication. | |||
| 36 | Multiplication | Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 4-digit number | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to be able to multiply any 4 digit number by any other 4 digit number using long multiplication. | |||
| 37 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20 with no remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20. | |||
| 38 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with no remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 and no remainders. | |||
| 39 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 2, 3 and 4 with divisors greater than 20 with no remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 2,3,4 where divisors are greater than 20 and there are no remainders. | |||
| 40 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2 and 3 with divisors less than 20 with remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2,3 where the divisors are less than 20 and there are remainders. | |||
| 41 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 where the divisors are greater than 12 and less than 20, and the dividend is any 3 digit number, and there are remainders. | |||
| 42 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 with remainders as fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 and remainders expressed as fractions | |||
| 43 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35 with some remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35, with some remainders. | |||
| 44 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 with dividends of 3 and 4-digits with some remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 and where dividends are 3 and 4 digit numbers, and there are some remainders. | |||
| 45 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 with dividends of thousands and some remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to use Long Division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 including division of thousands, and some remainders. | |||
| 46 | Division/repeat subtraction | Using divide, multiply and subtraction in the bring down method | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use Long Division using the Divide, Multiply, Subtract and Bring Down method. | |||
| 47 | Area | Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas. | |||
| 48 | Area | Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit. | |||
| 49 | Volume | Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo | |||
| 50 | Volume | Using the cubic centimetre to measure volume. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting. | |||
| 51 | Volume | Introducing the formula for volume. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula. | |||
| 52 | Volume | Using the cubic metre to measure volume. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat | |||
| 53 | Volume | Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms. | |||
| 54 | Volume | Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit. | |||
| 55 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 56 | Fractions | Fractions of whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection. | |||
| 57 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 58 | Fractions | Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 59 | Fractions | Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 60 | Fractions | Dividing fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions. | |||
| 61 | Fractions | Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 62 | Decimals | Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places. | |||
| 63 | Decimals | Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals. | |||
| 64 | Decimals | Adding decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 65 | Decimals | Subtracting decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 66 | Decimals | Using decimals – shopping problems | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money. | |||
| 67 | Decimals | Using decimals to record length | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements. | |||
| 68 | Decimals | Rounding decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number. | |||
| 69 | Decimals | Decimals to three decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths. | |||
| 70 | Decimals | Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places. | |||
| 71 | Decimals | Subtracting decimals with a different number of places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places. | |||
| 72 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 73 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers. | |||
| 74 | Decimals | Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits. | |||
| 75 | Decimals | Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 76 | Decimals | Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 77 | Decimals | Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction. | |||
| 78 | Percentages | Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage. | |||
| 79 | Percentages | Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion. | |||
| 80 | Percentages | Changing percentages to fractions and decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals. | |||
| 81 | Percentages | One quantity as a percentage of another | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another. | |||
| 82 | Percentages | Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities | |
| Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages | |||
| 83 | Equations | Problem solving strategies | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems. | |||
| 84 | Number problems | Problems with numbers. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy. | |||
| 85 | Algebraic expressions | Algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand. | |||
| 86 | Algebraic expressions | Substitution into algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations. | |||
| 87 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: addition and subtraction. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals. | |||
| 88 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: multiplication and division. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer. | |||
| 89 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing addition and subtraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side. | |||
| 90 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing multiplication and division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations. | |||
| 91 | Exam | Exam – Jnr Cert Foundation 1st Year | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Jnr Cert Ordinary 1st Year Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Jnr Cert Ordinary 1st Year | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Subtraction | Subtraction with borrowing | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method | |||
| 3 | Subtraction | Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct. | |||
| 4 | Multiplication | Multiplication – important facts. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences. | |||
| 5 | Multiplication | Multiples and factors of whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers. | |||
| 6 | Problems | Solve and record division using known facts and sharing | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems. | |||
| 7 | Multiplication | Multiplication using extended algorithms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms. | |||
| 8 | Division | Division with and without a remainder. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder. | |||
| 9 | Counting and numeration | Addition to 9999 and beyond | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems. | |||
| 10 | Subtraction | Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers. | |||
| 11 | Counting and numeration | Seven digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers. | |||
| 12 | Multiplication | Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form. | |||
| 13 | Division | Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction. | |||
| 14 | Length | Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres. | |||
| 15 | Length | Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map. | |||
| 16 | Length | Compare and convert formal units of measurement | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert. | |||
| 17 | Area | Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides. | |||
| 18 | Area | Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit. | |||
| 19 | Volume | Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo | |||
| 20 | Volume | Introducing the formula for volume. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula. | |||
| 21 | Volume | Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms. | |||
| 22 | Volume | Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit. | |||
| 23 | Fractions | Comparing and ordering fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts. | |||
| 24 | Fractions | mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one. | |||
| 25 | Fractions | Improper fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally. | |||
| 26 | Fractions | Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100. | |||
| 27 | Fractions | Finding equivalent fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines. | |||
| 28 | Fractions | Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form. | |||
| 29 | Fractions | Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor. | |||
| 30 | Fractions | Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one. | |||
| 31 | Fractions | Subtracting fractions from whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from | |||
| 32 | Fractions | Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions with the same denominator. | |||
| 33 | Fractions | Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other. | |||
| 34 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 35 | Fractions | Fractions of whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection. | |||
| 36 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 37 | Fractions | Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 38 | Fractions | Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 39 | Fractions | Dividing fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions. | |||
| 40 | Fractions | Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 41 | Rules properties | Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions. | |||
| 42 | Decimals | Introduction to decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places. | |||
| 43 | Decimals | Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places. | |||
| 44 | Decimals | Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals. | |||
| 45 | Decimals | Adding decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 46 | Decimals | Subtracting decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 47 | Decimals | Using decimals – shopping problems | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money. | |||
| 48 | Decimals | Using decimals to record length | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements. | |||
| 49 | Decimals | Rounding decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number. | |||
| 50 | Decimals | Decimals to three decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths. | |||
| 51 | Decimals | Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places. | |||
| 52 | Decimals | Subtracting decimals with a different number of places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places. | |||
| 53 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 54 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers. | |||
| 55 | Multiplication | Multiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication. | |||
| 56 | Multiplication | Multiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication. | |||
| 57 | Multiplication | Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number. | |||
| 58 | Multiplication | Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 3-digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 4 digit numbers by any 3 digit numbers using long multiplication. | |||
| 59 | Multiplication | Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 4-digit number | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to be able to multiply any 4 digit number by any other 4 digit number using long multiplication. | |||
| 60 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20 with no remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20. | |||
| 61 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with no remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 and no remainders. | |||
| 62 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 2, 3 and 4 with divisors greater than 20 with no remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 2,3,4 where divisors are greater than 20 and there are no remainders. | |||
| 63 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2 and 3 with divisors less than 20 with remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2,3 where the divisors are less than 20 and there are remainders. | |||
| 64 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 where the divisors are greater than 12 and less than 20, and the dividend is any 3 digit number, and there are remainders. | |||
| 65 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 with remainders as fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 and remainders expressed as fractions | |||
| 66 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35 with some remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35, with some remainders. | |||
| 67 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 with dividends of 3 and 4-digits with some remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 and where dividends are 3 and 4 digit numbers, and there are some remainders. | |||
| 68 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 with dividends of thousands and some remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to use Long Division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 including division of thousands, and some remainders. | |||
| 69 | Division/repeat subtraction | Using divide, multiply and subtraction in the bring down method | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use Long Division using the Divide, Multiply, Subtract and Bring Down method. | |||
| 70 | Equations | Problem solving strategies | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems. | |||
| 71 | Number problems | Problems with numbers. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy. | |||
| 72 | Length | Problems with length. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length. | |||
| 73 | Mass | Problems with mass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass. | |||
| 74 | Algebraic expressions | Algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand. | |||
| 75 | Algebraic expressions | Substitution into algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations. | |||
| 76 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: addition and subtraction. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals. | |||
| 77 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: multiplication and division. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer. | |||
| 78 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms. | |||
| 79 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction. | |||
| 80 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes. | |||
| 81 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form. | |||
| 82 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions. | |||
| 83 | Geometry-quadrilaterals | Quadrilaterals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees. | |||
| 84 | Exam | Exam – Jnr Cert Ordinary 1st Year | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Jnr Cert Higher 1st Year Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Jnr Cert Higher 1st Year | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Area | Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit. | |||
| 3 | Volume | Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo | |||
| 4 | Volume | Introducing the formula for volume. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula. | |||
| 5 | Volume | Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms. | |||
| 6 | Volume | Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit. | |||
| 7 | Area | Area of a trapezium. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula. | |||
| 8 | Area | Area of a rhombus. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems. | |||
| 9 | Area | Area of a circle. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle. | |||
| 10 | Area | Area of regular polygons and composite figures. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 11 | Volume | Finding the volume of prisms | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume. | |||
| 12 | Volume | Volume of a cylinder and sphere. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume. | |||
| 13 | Volume | Volume of pyramids and cones. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones. | |||
| 14 | Volume | Composite solids. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately. | |||
| 15 | Fractions | Comparing and ordering fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts. | |||
| 16 | Fractions | mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one. | |||
| 17 | Fractions | Improper fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally. | |||
| 18 | Fractions | Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100. | |||
| 19 | Fractions | Finding equivalent fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines. | |||
| 20 | Fractions | Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form. | |||
| 21 | Fractions | Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor. | |||
| 22 | Fractions | Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one. | |||
| 23 | Fractions | Subtracting fractions from whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from | |||
| 24 | Fractions | Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions with the same denominator. | |||
| 25 | Fractions | Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other. | |||
| 26 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 27 | Fractions | Fractions of whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection. | |||
| 28 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 29 | Fractions | Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 30 | Fractions | Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 31 | Fractions | Dividing fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions. | |||
| 32 | Fractions | Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 33 | Rules properties | Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions. | |||
| 34 | Decimals | Introduction to decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places. | |||
| 35 | Decimals | Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places. | |||
| 36 | Decimals | Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals. | |||
| 37 | Decimals | Adding decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 38 | Decimals | Subtracting decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 39 | Decimals | Using decimals – shopping problems | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money. | |||
| 40 | Decimals | Using decimals to record length | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements. | |||
| 41 | Decimals | Rounding decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number. | |||
| 42 | Decimals | Decimals to three decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths. | |||
| 43 | Decimals | Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places. | |||
| 44 | Decimals | Subtracting decimals with a different number of places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places. | |||
| 45 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 46 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers. | |||
| 47 | Decimals | Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits. | |||
| 48 | Decimals | Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 49 | Decimals | Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 50 | Decimals | Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction. | |||
| 51 | Percentages | Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage. | |||
| 52 | Percentages | Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion. | |||
| 53 | Percentages | Changing percentages to fractions and decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals. | |||
| 54 | Percentages | One quantity as a percentage of another | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another. | |||
| 55 | Percentages | Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities | |
| Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages | |||
| 56 | Multiplication | Multiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication. | |||
| 57 | Multiplication | Multiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication. | |||
| 58 | Multiplication | Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number. | |||
| 59 | Multiplication | Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 3-digit numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 4 digit numbers by any 3 digit numbers using long multiplication. | |||
| 60 | Multiplication | Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 4-digit number | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to be able to multiply any 4 digit number by any other 4 digit number using long multiplication. | |||
| 61 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20 with no remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20. | |||
| 62 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with no remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 and no remainders. | |||
| 63 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 2, 3 and 4 with divisors greater than 20 with no remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 2,3,4 where divisors are greater than 20 and there are no remainders. | |||
| 64 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2 and 3 with divisors less than 20 with remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2,3 where the divisors are less than 20 and there are remainders. | |||
| 65 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 where the divisors are greater than 12 and less than 20, and the dividend is any 3 digit number, and there are remainders. | |||
| 66 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 with remainders as fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 and remainders expressed as fractions | |||
| 67 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35 with some remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35, with some remainders. | |||
| 68 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 with dividends of 3 and 4-digits with some remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 and where dividends are 3 and 4 digit numbers, and there are some remainders. | |||
| 69 | Division/repeat subtraction | Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 with dividends of thousands and some remainders | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to use Long Division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 including division of thousands, and some remainders. | |||
| 70 | Division/repeat subtraction | Using divide, multiply and subtraction in the bring down method | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use Long Division using the Divide, Multiply, Subtract and Bring Down method. | |||
| 71 | Equations | Problem solving strategies | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems. | |||
| 72 | Number problems | Problems with numbers. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy. | |||
| 73 | Length | Problems with length. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length. | |||
| 74 | Mass | Problems with mass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass. | |||
| 75 | Area | Problems with area. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area. | |||
| 76 | Volume/capacity | Problems with volume/capacity. | |
| Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity | |||
| 77 | Algebraic expressions | Algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand. | |||
| 78 | Algebraic expressions | Substitution into algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations. | |||
| 79 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: addition and subtraction. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals. | |||
| 80 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: multiplication and division. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer. | |||
| 81 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms. | |||
| 82 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction. | |||
| 83 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes. | |||
| 84 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form. | |||
| 85 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions. | |||
| 86 | Special triangles | Special triangles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles. | |||
| 87 | Geometry-quadrilaterals | Quadrilaterals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees. | |||
| 88 | Exam | Exam – Jnr Cert Higher 1st Year | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Jnr Cert Foundation 2nd Year Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Jnr Cert Foundation 2nd Year | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Area | Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas. | |||
| 3 | Area | Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit. | |||
| 4 | Volume | Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo | |||
| 5 | Volume | Using the cubic centimetre to measure volume. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting. | |||
| 6 | Volume | Introducing the formula for volume. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula. | |||
| 7 | Volume | Using the cubic metre to measure volume. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat | |||
| 8 | Volume | Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms. | |||
| 9 | Volume | Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit. | |||
| 10 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 11 | Fractions | Fractions of whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection. | |||
| 12 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 13 | Fractions | Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 14 | Fractions | Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 15 | Fractions | Dividing fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions. | |||
| 16 | Fractions | Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 17 | Decimals | Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places. | |||
| 18 | Decimals | Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals. | |||
| 19 | Decimals | Adding decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 20 | Decimals | Subtracting decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 21 | Decimals | Using decimals – shopping problems | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money. | |||
| 22 | Decimals | Using decimals to record length | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements. | |||
| 23 | Decimals | Rounding decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number. | |||
| 24 | Decimals | Decimals to three decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths. | |||
| 25 | Decimals | Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places. | |||
| 26 | Decimals | Subtracting decimals with a different number of places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places. | |||
| 27 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 28 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers. | |||
| 29 | Decimals | Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits. | |||
| 30 | Decimals | Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 31 | Decimals | Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 32 | Decimals | Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction. | |||
| 33 | Percentages | Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage. | |||
| 34 | Percentages | Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion. | |||
| 35 | Percentages | Changing percentages to fractions and decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals. | |||
| 36 | Percentages | One quantity as a percentage of another | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another. | |||
| 37 | Percentages | Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities | |
| Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages | |||
| 38 | Equations | Problem solving strategies | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems. | |||
| 39 | Number problems | Problems with numbers. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy. | |||
| 40 | Algebraic expressions | Algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand. | |||
| 41 | Algebraic expressions | Substitution into algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations. | |||
| 42 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: addition and subtraction. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals. | |||
| 43 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: multiplication and division. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer. | |||
| 44 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing addition and subtraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side. | |||
| 45 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing multiplication and division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations. | |||
| 46 | Length | Problems with length. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length. | |||
| 47 | Mass | Problems with mass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass. | |||
| 48 | Area | Problems with area. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area. | |||
| 49 | Algebra- formulae | Equations resulting from substitution into formulae. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations. | |||
| 50 | Algebra- formulae | Changing the subject of the formula. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously. | |||
| 51 | Geometry-angles | Measuring angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is. | |||
| 52 | Geometry-angles | Adjacent angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems. | |||
| 53 | Geometry-angles | Complementary and supplementary angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 54 | Geometry-angles | Vertically opposite angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 55 | Geometry-angles | Angles at a Point. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 56 | Geometry-angles | Parallel Lines. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles. | |||
| 57 | Geometry-problems | Additional questions involving parallel lines | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them. | |||
| 58 | Geometry-triangles | Angle sum of a triangle | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems. | |||
| 59 | Geometry-triangles | Exterior angle theorem | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the exterior angle of a triangle theorem to solve geometric questions. | |||
| 60 | Significant figures | Significant figures | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures. | |||
| 61 | Geometry-polygons | Angles of regular polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the angle sum of a polygon formula, and understand that the external angles of a polygon add up to 360 degrees. | |||
| 62 | Factorising | Expansions leading to the difference of two squares | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand expansions leading to differences of 2 squares. | |||
| 63 | Sequences and Series-Compound interest | Compound interest | |
| Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods. | |||
| 64 | Sequences and Series-Superannuation | Superannuation. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P. | |||
| 65 | Sequences and Series-Time payments | Time payments. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan. | |||
| 66 | Exam | Exam – Jnr Cert Foundation 2nd Year | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Jnr Cert Ordinary 2nd Year Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Jnr Cert Ordinary 2nd Year | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Volume | Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms. | |||
| 3 | Volume | Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit. | |||
| 4 | Area | Area of a trapezium. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula. | |||
| 5 | Area | Area of a rhombus. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems. | |||
| 6 | Area | Area of a circle. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle. | |||
| 7 | Area | Area of regular polygons and composite figures. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 8 | Volume | Finding the volume of prisms | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume. | |||
| 9 | Volume | Volume of a cylinder and sphere. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume. | |||
| 10 | Volume | Volume of pyramids and cones. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones. | |||
| 11 | Volume | Composite solids. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately. | |||
| 12 | Fractions | Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 13 | Fractions | Dividing fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions. | |||
| 14 | Fractions | Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 15 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 16 | Fractions | Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 17 | Rules properties | Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions. | |||
| 18 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 19 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers. | |||
| 20 | Decimals | Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits. | |||
| 21 | Decimals | Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 22 | Decimals | Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 23 | Decimals | Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction. | |||
| 24 | Percentages | Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage. | |||
| 25 | Percentages | Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion. | |||
| 26 | Percentages | Changing percentages to fractions and decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals. | |||
| 27 | Percentages | One quantity as a percentage of another | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another. | |||
| 28 | Percentages | Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities | |
| Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages | |||
| 29 | Equations | Problem solving strategies | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems. | |||
| 30 | Number problems | Problems with numbers. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy. | |||
| 31 | Length | Problems with length. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length. | |||
| 32 | Mass | Problems with mass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass. | |||
| 33 | Area | Problems with area. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area. | |||
| 34 | Surface area | Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 35 | Surface area | Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 36 | Surface area | Surface area of a cylinder and sphere. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 37 | Surface area | Surface area of pyramids | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids. | |||
| 38 | Surface area | Surface area of cones | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul | |||
| 39 | Surface area | Surface area of composite solids | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids. | |||
| 40 | Algebraic expressions | Algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand. | |||
| 41 | Algebraic expressions | Substitution into algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations. | |||
| 42 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: addition and subtraction. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals. | |||
| 43 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: multiplication and division. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer. | |||
| 44 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms. | |||
| 45 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction. | |||
| 46 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes. | |||
| 47 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form. | |||
| 48 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions. | |||
| 49 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step. | |||
| 50 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier. | |||
| 51 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions. | |||
| 52 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing addition and subtraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side. | |||
| 53 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing multiplication and division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations. | |||
| 54 | Algebraic equations | Solving two step equations | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations. | |||
| 55 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing binomial expressions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations. | |||
| 56 | Algebraic equations | Equations involving grouping symbols. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols | |||
| 57 | Algebraic equations | Equations involving fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions. | |||
| 58 | Geometry-angles | Measuring angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is. | |||
| 59 | Geometry-angles | Adjacent angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems. | |||
| 60 | Geometry-angles | Complementary and supplementary angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 61 | Geometry-angles | Vertically opposite angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 62 | Geometry-angles | Angles at a Point. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 63 | Geometry-angles | Parallel Lines. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles. | |||
| 64 | Geometry-problems | Additional questions involving parallel lines | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them. | |||
| 65 | Geometry-triangles | Angle sum of a triangle | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems. | |||
| 66 | Geometry-triangles | Exterior angle theorem | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the exterior angle of a triangle theorem to solve geometric questions. | |||
| 67 | Geometry-quadrilaterals | Quadrilaterals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees. | |||
| 68 | Geometry-constructions | Geometric constructions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses. | |||
| 69 | Trigonometry-ratios | Trigonometric ratios. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op | |||
| 70 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the calculator. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles. | |||
| 71 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances. | |||
| 72 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle. | |||
| 73 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle. | |||
| 74 | Statistics | Frequency distribution table | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table. | |||
| 75 | Statistics | Frequency histograms and polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons. | |||
| 76 | Statistics | Relative frequency | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data. | |||
| 77 | Statistics | The range. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table. | |||
| 78 | Statistic-probability | The mode | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon. | |||
| 79 | Statistic-probability | The mean | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column. | |||
| 80 | Statistic-probability | The median | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores | |||
| 81 | Statistic-probability | Cumulative frequency | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons. | |||
| 82 | Statistic-probability | Calculating the median from a frequency distribution | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon. | |||
| 83 | Statistic-probability | Probability of Simple Events | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events. | |||
| 84 | Statistic-probability | Rolling a pair of dice | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously. | |||
| 85 | Exam | Exam – Jnr Cert Ordinary 2nd Year | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Jnr Cert Higher 2nd Year Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Jnr Cert Higher 2nd Year | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Area | Area of a trapezium. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula. | |||
| 3 | Area | Area of a rhombus. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems. | |||
| 4 | Area | Area of a circle. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle. | |||
| 5 | Area | Area of regular polygons and composite figures. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 6 | Volume | Finding the volume of prisms | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume. | |||
| 7 | Volume | Volume of a cylinder and sphere. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume. | |||
| 8 | Volume | Volume of pyramids and cones. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones. | |||
| 9 | Volume | Composite solids. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately. | |||
| 10 | Decimals | Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits. | |||
| 11 | Decimals | Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 12 | Decimals | Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 13 | Decimals | Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction. | |||
| 14 | Percentages | Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage. | |||
| 15 | Percentages | Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion. | |||
| 16 | Percentages | Changing percentages to fractions and decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals. | |||
| 17 | Percentages | One quantity as a percentage of another | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another. | |||
| 18 | Percentages | Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities | |
| Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages | |||
| 19 | Equations | Problem solving strategies | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems. | |||
| 20 | Number problems | Problems with numbers. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy. | |||
| 21 | Length | Problems with length. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length. | |||
| 22 | Mass | Problems with mass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass. | |||
| 23 | Area | Problems with area. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area. | |||
| 24 | Volume/capacity | Problems with volume/capacity. | |
| Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity | |||
| 25 | Surface area | Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 26 | Surface area | Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 27 | Surface area | Surface area of a cylinder and sphere. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 28 | Surface area | Surface area of pyramids | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids. | |||
| 29 | Surface area | Surface area of cones | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul | |||
| 30 | Surface area | Surface area of composite solids | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids. | |||
| 31 | Algebraic expressions | Algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand. | |||
| 32 | Algebraic expressions | Substitution into algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations. | |||
| 33 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: addition and subtraction. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals. | |||
| 34 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: multiplication and division. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer. | |||
| 35 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms. | |||
| 36 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction. | |||
| 37 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes. | |||
| 38 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form. | |||
| 39 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions. | |||
| 40 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step. | |||
| 41 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier. | |||
| 42 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions. | |||
| 43 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing addition and subtraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side. | |||
| 44 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing multiplication and division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations. | |||
| 45 | Algebraic equations | Solving two step equations | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations. | |||
| 46 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing binomial expressions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations. | |||
| 47 | Algebraic equations | Equations involving grouping symbols. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols | |||
| 48 | Algebraic equations | Equations involving fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions. | |||
| 49 | Algebra- formulae | Equations resulting from substitution into formulae. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations. | |||
| 50 | Algebra- formulae | Changing the subject of the formula. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously. | |||
| 51 | Algebra-inequalities | Solving Inequalities. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities. | |||
| 52 | Algebra-factorising | Simplifying easy algebraic fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising. | |||
| 53 | Factorisation | Factorisation of algebraic fractions including binomials. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to simplify more complex algebraic fractions using a variety of methods. | |||
| 54 | Rules for indices/exponents | Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base. | |||
| 55 | Rules for indices/exponents | Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base. | |||
| 56 | Rules for indices/exponents | Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power. | |||
| 57 | Rules for indices/exponents | Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power. | |||
| 58 | Geometry-angles | Measuring angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is. | |||
| 59 | Geometry-angles | Adjacent angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems. | |||
| 60 | Geometry-angles | Complementary and supplementary angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 61 | Geometry-angles | Vertically opposite angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 62 | Geometry-angles | Angles at a Point. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 63 | Geometry-angles | Parallel Lines. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles. | |||
| 64 | Geometry-problems | Additional questions involving parallel lines | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them. | |||
| 65 | Geometry-triangles | Angle sum of a triangle | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems. | |||
| 66 | Geometry-triangles | Exterior angle theorem | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the exterior angle of a triangle theorem to solve geometric questions. | |||
| 67 | Special triangles | Special triangles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles. | |||
| 68 | Geometry-quadrilaterals | Quadrilaterals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees. | |||
| 69 | Geometry-constructions | Geometric constructions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses. | |||
| 70 | Trigonometry-ratios | Trigonometric ratios. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op | |||
| 71 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the calculator. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles. | |||
| 72 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances. | |||
| 73 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle. | |||
| 74 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle. | |||
| 75 | Trigonometry-compass | Bearings – the compass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north. | |||
| 76 | Statistics | Frequency distribution table | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table. | |||
| 77 | Statistics | Frequency histograms and polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons. | |||
| 78 | Statistics | Relative frequency | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data. | |||
| 79 | Statistics | The range. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table. | |||
| 80 | Statistic-probability | The mode | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon. | |||
| 81 | Statistic-probability | The mean | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column. | |||
| 82 | Statistic-probability | The median | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores | |||
| 83 | Statistic-probability | Cumulative frequency | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons. | |||
| 84 | Statistic-probability | Calculating the median from a frequency distribution | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon. | |||
| 85 | Statistic-probability | Probability of Simple Events | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events. | |||
| 86 | Statistic-probability | Rolling a pair of dice | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously. | |||
| 87 | Rules for indices/exponents | Terms raised to the power of zero | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero. | |||
| 88 | Rules for indices/exponents | Negative Indices | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices. | |||
| 89 | Fractional indices/exponents | Fractional indices | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices. | |||
| 90 | Scientific notation | Scientific notation with larger numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation. | |||
| 91 | Significant figures | Significant figures | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures. | |||
| 92 | Exam | Exam – Jnr Cert Higher 2nd Year | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Jnr Cert Foundation 3rd Year Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Jnr Cert Foundation 3rd Year | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Area | Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas. | |||
| 3 | Area | Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit. | |||
| 4 | Volume | Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo | |||
| 5 | Volume | Using the cubic centimetre to measure volume. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting. | |||
| 6 | Volume | Introducing the formula for volume. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula. | |||
| 7 | Volume | Using the cubic metre to measure volume. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat | |||
| 8 | Volume | Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms. | |||
| 9 | Volume | Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit. | |||
| 10 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 11 | Fractions | Fractions of whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection. | |||
| 12 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 13 | Fractions | Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 14 | Fractions | Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 15 | Fractions | Dividing fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions. | |||
| 16 | Fractions | Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 17 | Decimals | Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places. | |||
| 18 | Decimals | Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals. | |||
| 19 | Decimals | Adding decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 20 | Decimals | Subtracting decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 21 | Decimals | Using decimals – shopping problems | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money. | |||
| 22 | Decimals | Using decimals to record length | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements. | |||
| 23 | Decimals | Rounding decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number. | |||
| 24 | Decimals | Decimals to three decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths. | |||
| 25 | Decimals | Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places. | |||
| 26 | Decimals | Subtracting decimals with a different number of places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places. | |||
| 27 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 28 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers. | |||
| 29 | Decimals | Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits. | |||
| 30 | Decimals | Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 31 | Decimals | Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 32 | Decimals | Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction. | |||
| 33 | Percentages | Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage. | |||
| 34 | Percentages | Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion. | |||
| 35 | Percentages | Changing percentages to fractions and decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals. | |||
| 36 | Percentages | One quantity as a percentage of another | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another. | |||
| 37 | Percentages | Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities | |
| Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages | |||
| 38 | Equations | Problem solving strategies | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems. | |||
| 39 | Number problems | Problems with numbers. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy. | |||
| 40 | Algebraic expressions | Algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand. | |||
| 41 | Algebraic expressions | Substitution into algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations. | |||
| 42 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: addition and subtraction. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals. | |||
| 43 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: multiplication and division. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer. | |||
| 44 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing addition and subtraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side. | |||
| 45 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing multiplication and division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations. | |||
| 46 | Length | Problems with length. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length. | |||
| 47 | Mass | Problems with mass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass. | |||
| 48 | Area | Problems with area. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area. | |||
| 49 | Algebra- formulae | Equations resulting from substitution into formulae. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations. | |||
| 50 | Algebra- formulae | Changing the subject of the formula. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously. | |||
| 51 | Geometry-angles | Measuring angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is. | |||
| 52 | Geometry-angles | Adjacent angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems. | |||
| 53 | Geometry-angles | Complementary and supplementary angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 54 | Geometry-angles | Vertically opposite angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 55 | Geometry-angles | Angles at a Point. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 56 | Geometry-angles | Parallel Lines. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles. | |||
| 57 | Geometry-problems | Additional questions involving parallel lines | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them. | |||
| 58 | Geometry-triangles | Angle sum of a triangle | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems. | |||
| 59 | Geometry-triangles | Exterior angle theorem | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the exterior angle of a triangle theorem to solve geometric questions. | |||
| 60 | Geometry-constructions | Geometric constructions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses. | |||
| 61 | Geometry-polygons | Angles of regular polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the angle sum of a polygon formula, and understand that the external angles of a polygon add up to 360 degrees. | |||
| 62 | Sequences and Series-Compound interest | Compound interest | |
| Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods. | |||
| 63 | Sequences and Series-Superannuation | Superannuation. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P. | |||
| 64 | Sequences and Series-Time payments | Time payments. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan. | |||
| 65 | Exam | Exam – Jnr Cert Foundation 3rd Year | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Jnr Cert Ordinary 3rd Year Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Jnr Cert Ordinary 3rd Year | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Area | Area of a trapezium. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula. | |||
| 3 | Area | Area of a rhombus. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems. | |||
| 4 | Area | Area of a circle. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle. | |||
| 5 | Area | Area of regular polygons and composite figures. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 6 | Volume | Finding the volume of prisms | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume. | |||
| 7 | Volume | Volume of a cylinder and sphere. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume. | |||
| 8 | Volume | Volume of pyramids and cones. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones. | |||
| 9 | Volume | Composite solids. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately. | |||
| 10 | Fractions | Dividing fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions. | |||
| 11 | Fractions | Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 12 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 13 | Fractions | Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 14 | Rules properties | Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions. | |||
| 15 | Decimals | Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits. | |||
| 16 | Decimals | Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 17 | Decimals | Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 18 | Decimals | Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction. | |||
| 19 | Percentages | Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion. | |||
| 20 | Percentages | Changing percentages to fractions and decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals. | |||
| 21 | Percentages | One quantity as a percentage of another | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another. | |||
| 22 | Percentages | Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities | |
| Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages | |||
| 23 | Equations | Problem solving strategies | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems. | |||
| 24 | Number problems | Problems with numbers. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy. | |||
| 25 | Length | Problems with length. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length. | |||
| 26 | Mass | Problems with mass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass. | |||
| 27 | Area | Problems with area. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area. | |||
| 28 | Surface area | Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 29 | Surface area | Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 30 | Surface area | Surface area of a cylinder and sphere. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 31 | Surface area | Surface area of pyramids | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids. | |||
| 32 | Surface area | Surface area of cones | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul | |||
| 33 | Surface area | Surface area of composite solids | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids. | |||
| 34 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step. | |||
| 35 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier. | |||
| 36 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions. | |||
| 37 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing addition and subtraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side. | |||
| 38 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing multiplication and division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations. | |||
| 39 | Algebraic equations | Solving two step equations | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations. | |||
| 40 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing binomial expressions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations. | |||
| 41 | Algebraic equations | Equations involving grouping symbols. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols | |||
| 42 | Algebraic equations | Equations involving fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions. | |||
| 43 | Algebra- formulae | Equations resulting from substitution into formulae. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations. | |||
| 44 | Algebra- formulae | Changing the subject of the formula. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously. | |||
| 45 | Algebra-inequalities | Solving Inequalities. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities. | |||
| 46 | Algebra-factorising | Simplifying easy algebraic fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising. | |||
| 47 | Rules for indices/exponents | Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base. | |||
| 48 | Rules for indices/exponents | Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base. | |||
| 49 | Rules for indices/exponents | Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power. | |||
| 50 | Rules for indices/exponents | Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power. | |||
| 51 | Rules for indices/exponents | Terms raised to the power of zero | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero. | |||
| 52 | Rules for indices/exponents | Negative Indices | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices. | |||
| 53 | Scientific notation | Scientific notation with larger numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation. | |||
| 54 | Significant figures | Significant figures | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures. | |||
| 55 | Geometry-angles | Measuring angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is. | |||
| 56 | Geometry-angles | Adjacent angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems. | |||
| 57 | Geometry-angles | Complementary and supplementary angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 58 | Geometry-angles | Vertically opposite angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 59 | Geometry-angles | Angles at a Point. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 60 | Geometry-angles | Parallel Lines. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles. | |||
| 61 | Geometry-problems | Additional questions involving parallel lines | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them. | |||
| 62 | Geometry-triangles | Angle sum of a triangle | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems. | |||
| 63 | Geometry-triangles | Exterior angle theorem | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the exterior angle of a triangle theorem to solve geometric questions. | |||
| 64 | Geometry-quadrilaterals | Quadrilaterals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees. | |||
| 65 | Geometry-constructions | Geometric constructions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses. | |||
| 66 | Geometry problems | More difficult exercises involving parallel lines | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles in questions that are more difficult than previously completed. Students will also learn to use other geometric properties as well as set out log | |||
| 67 | Geometry-reasoning | Further difficult exercises involving formal reasoning | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which geometric properties are needed to complete a question and be able to use formal reasoning to write out this information. | |||
| 68 | Geometry-polygons | Angles of regular polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the angle sum of a polygon formula, and understand that the external angles of a polygon add up to 360 degrees. | |||
| 69 | Geometry-congruence | Congruent triangles, Test 1 and 2 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent. | |||
| 70 | Geometry-congruence | Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent. | |||
| 71 | Geometry-congruence | Proofs and congruent triangles. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent. | |||
| 72 | Similar triangles | Using similar triangles to calculate lengths | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles. | |||
| 73 | Difference of 2 squares | Difference of two squares | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors. | |||
| 74 | Common fact and diff | Common factor and the difference of two squares | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares. | |||
| 75 | Quadratic trinomials | Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive. | |||
| 76 | Trigonometry-ratios | Trigonometric ratios. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op | |||
| 77 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the calculator. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles. | |||
| 78 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances. | |||
| 79 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle. | |||
| 80 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle. | |||
| 81 | Coordinate Geometry-the plane | Distance formula. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results. | |||
| 82 | Coordinate Geometry-midpoint, slope | Mid-point formula | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the mid point formula and use it practically. | |||
| 83 | Coordinate Geometry-gradient | Gradient | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run. | |||
| 84 | Coordinate Geometry-gradient | Gradient formula. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines. | |||
| 85 | Coordinate Geometry-straight line | The straight line. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists. | |||
| 86 | Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. | Lines through the origin. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems. | |||
| 87 | Statistics | Frequency distribution table | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table. | |||
| 88 | Statistics | Frequency histograms and polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons. | |||
| 89 | Statistics | Relative frequency | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data. | |||
| 90 | Statistics | The range. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table. | |||
| 91 | Statistic-probability | The mode | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon. | |||
| 92 | Statistic-probability | The mean | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column. | |||
| 93 | Statistic-probability | The median | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores | |||
| 94 | Statistic-probability | Cumulative frequency | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons. | |||
| 95 | Statistic-probability | Calculating the median from a frequency distribution | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon. | |||
| 96 | Statistic-probability | Probability of Simple Events | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events. | |||
| 97 | Statistic-probability | Rolling a pair of dice | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously. | |||
| 98 | Sequences and Series-Compound interest | Compound interest | |
| Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods. | |||
| 99 | Sequences and Series-Superannuation | Superannuation. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P. | |||
| 100 | Sequences and Series-Time payments | Time payments. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan. | |||
| 101 | Exam | Exam – Jnr Cert Ordinary 3rd Year | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Jnr Cert Higher 3rd Year Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Jnr Cert Higher 3rd Year | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Percentages | Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities | |
| Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages | |||
| 3 | Equations | Problem solving strategies | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems. | |||
| 4 | Number problems | Problems with numbers. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy. | |||
| 5 | Length | Problems with length. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length. | |||
| 6 | Mass | Problems with mass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass. | |||
| 7 | Area | Problems with area. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area. | |||
| 8 | Surface area | Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 9 | Surface area | Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 10 | Surface area | Surface area of a cylinder and sphere. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 11 | Surface area | Surface area of pyramids | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids. | |||
| 12 | Surface area | Surface area of cones | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul | |||
| 13 | Surface area | Surface area of composite solids | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids. | |||
| 14 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step. | |||
| 15 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier. | |||
| 16 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions. | |||
| 17 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing addition and subtraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side. | |||
| 18 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing multiplication and division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations. | |||
| 19 | Algebraic equations | Solving two step equations | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations. | |||
| 20 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing binomial expressions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations. | |||
| 21 | Algebraic equations | Equations involving grouping symbols. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols | |||
| 22 | Algebraic equations | Equations involving fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions. | |||
| 23 | Algebra- formulae | Equations resulting from substitution into formulae. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations. | |||
| 24 | Algebra- formulae | Changing the subject of the formula. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously. | |||
| 25 | Algebra-inequalities | Solving Inequalities. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities. | |||
| 26 | Algebra-factorising | Simplifying easy algebraic fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising. | |||
| 27 | Factorisation | Factorisation of algebraic fractions including binomials. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to simplify more complex algebraic fractions using a variety of methods. | |||
| 28 | Rules for indices/exponents | Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base. | |||
| 29 | Rules for indices/exponents | Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base. | |||
| 30 | Rules for indices/exponents | Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power. | |||
| 31 | Rules for indices/exponents | Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power. | |||
| 32 | Rules for indices/exponents | Terms raised to the power of zero | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero. | |||
| 33 | Rules for indices/exponents | Negative Indices | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices. | |||
| 34 | Fractional indices/exponents | Fractional indices | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices. | |||
| 35 | Geometry-triangles | Exterior angle theorem | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the exterior angle of a triangle theorem to solve geometric questions. | |||
| 36 | Significant figures | Significant figures | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures. | |||
| 37 | Geometry-angles | Measuring angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is. | |||
| 38 | Geometry-angles | Adjacent angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems. | |||
| 39 | Geometry-angles | Complementary and supplementary angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 40 | Geometry-angles | Vertically opposite angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 41 | Geometry-angles | Angles at a Point. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 42 | Geometry-angles | Parallel Lines. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles. | |||
| 43 | Geometry-problems | Additional questions involving parallel lines | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them. | |||
| 44 | Geometry-triangles | Angle sum of a triangle | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems. | |||
| 45 | Geometry problems | More difficult exercises involving parallel lines | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles in questions that are more difficult than previously completed. Students will also learn to use other geometric properties as well as set out log | |||
| 46 | Geometry-reasoning | Further difficult exercises involving formal reasoning | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which geometric properties are needed to complete a question and be able to use formal reasoning to write out this information. | |||
| 47 | Geometry-polygons | Angles of regular polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the angle sum of a polygon formula, and understand that the external angles of a polygon add up to 360 degrees. | |||
| 48 | Geometry-congruence | Congruent triangles, Test 1 and 2 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent. | |||
| 49 | Geometry-congruence | Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent. | |||
| 50 | Geometry-congruence | Proofs and congruent triangles. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent. | |||
| 51 | Similar triangles | Similar triangles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar. | |||
| 52 | Similar triangles | Using similar triangles to calculate lengths | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles. | |||
| 53 | Overlapping triangles | Examples involving overlapping triangles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles. | |||
| 54 | Surds | Introducing surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers. | |||
| 55 | Surds | Some rules for the operations with surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for division and multiplication of surds. | |||
| 56 | Surds | Simplifying surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for simplifying surds using division and multiplication. | |||
| 57 | Simultaneous equns | Simultaneous equations | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method. | |||
| 58 | Simultaneous equns | Elimination method | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method. | |||
| 59 | Simultaneous equns | Elimination method part 2 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method. | |||
| 60 | Functions and graphs | Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis. | |||
| 61 | Functions and graphs | Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve. | |||
| 62 | Factorising | Expansions leading to the difference of two squares | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand expansions leading to differences of 2 squares. | |||
| 63 | Algebra-highest common factor | Highest common factor. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of turning a simple algebraic expression into the product of a factor in parentheses and identifying the highest common factors of the whole expression. | |||
| 64 | Factors by grouping | Factors by grouping. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression. | |||
| 65 | Difference of 2 squares | Difference of two squares | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors. | |||
| 66 | Common fact and diff | Common factor and the difference of two squares | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares. | |||
| 67 | Quadratic trinomials | Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive. | |||
| 68 | Algebraic fractions | Simplifying algebraic fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be familiar with all of the factorisation methods presented to this point. | |||
| 69 | Trigonometry-ratios | Trigonometric ratios. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op | |||
| 70 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the calculator. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles. | |||
| 71 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances. | |||
| 72 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle. | |||
| 73 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle. | |||
| 74 | Trigonometry-compass | Bearings – the compass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north. | |||
| 75 | Coordinate Geometry-the plane | Distance formula. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results. | |||
| 76 | Coordinate Geometry-midpoint, slope | Mid-point formula | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the mid point formula and use it practically. | |||
| 77 | Coordinate Geometry-gradient | Gradient | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run. | |||
| 78 | Coordinate Geometry-gradient | Gradient formula. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines. | |||
| 79 | Coordinate Geometry-straight line | The straight line. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists. | |||
| 80 | Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. | Lines through the origin. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems. | |||
| 81 | Coordinate Geometry-equation of line | General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa. | |||
| 82 | Coordinate Geometry-intercept | Slope intercept form of a line. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation. | |||
| 83 | Coordinate Geometry-point slope | Point slope form of a line | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line. | |||
| 84 | Statistics | Frequency distribution table | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table. | |||
| 85 | Statistics | Frequency histograms and polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons. | |||
| 86 | Statistics | Relative frequency | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data. | |||
| 87 | Statistics | The range. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table. | |||
| 88 | Statistic-probability | The mode | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon. | |||
| 89 | Statistic-probability | The mean | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column. | |||
| 90 | Statistic-probability | The median | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores | |||
| 91 | Statistic-probability | Cumulative frequency | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons. | |||
| 92 | Statistic-probability | Calculating the median from a frequency distribution | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon. | |||
| 93 | Statistic-probability | Probability of Simple Events | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events. | |||
| 94 | Statistic-probability | Rolling a pair of dice | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously. | |||
| 95 | Circle Geometry | Theorem – The angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc. | |||
| 96 | Circle Geometry | Theorem – The tangent to a circle is perpendicular to the radius drawn to it at the point of contact. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the tangent and the radius of a circle are perpendicular at the point of contact. | |||
| 97 | Sequences and Series-Compound interest | Compound interest | |
| Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods. | |||
| 98 | Sequences and Series-Superannuation | Superannuation. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P. | |||
| 99 | Sequences and Series-Time payments | Time payments. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan. | |||
| 100 | Exam | Exam – Jnr Cert Higher 3rd Year | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Leaving Cert Foundation 5th Year Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Leaving Cert Foundation 5th Year | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Length | Compare and convert formal units of measurement | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert. | |||
| 3 | Area | Area of a trapezium. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula. | |||
| 4 | Area | Area of a rhombus. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems. | |||
| 5 | Area | Area of a circle. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle. | |||
| 6 | Area | Area of regular polygons and composite figures. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 7 | Volume | Finding the volume of prisms | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume. | |||
| 8 | Volume | Volume of a cylinder and sphere. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume. | |||
| 9 | Volume | Volume of pyramids and cones. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones. | |||
| 10 | Volume | Composite solids. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately. | |||
| 11 | Fractions | Finding equivalent fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines. | |||
| 12 | Rules properties | Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions. | |||
| 13 | Decimals | Introduction to decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places. | |||
| 14 | Decimals | Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places. | |||
| 15 | Decimals | Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals. | |||
| 16 | Decimals | Adding decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 17 | Decimals | Subtracting decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places) | |||
| 18 | Decimals | Using decimals – shopping problems | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money. | |||
| 19 | Decimals | Using decimals to record length | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements. | |||
| 20 | Decimals | Rounding decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number. | |||
| 21 | Decimals | Decimals to three decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths. | |||
| 22 | Decimals | Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places. | |||
| 23 | Decimals | Subtracting decimals with a different number of places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places. | |||
| 24 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 25 | Decimals | Multiplying decimals by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers. | |||
| 26 | Decimals | Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits. | |||
| 27 | Decimals | Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand. | |||
| 28 | Decimals | Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 29 | Decimals | Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction. | |||
| 30 | Percentages | Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage. | |||
| 31 | Percentages | Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion. | |||
| 32 | Percentages | Changing percentages to fractions and decimals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals. | |||
| 33 | Percentages | One quantity as a percentage of another | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another. | |||
| 34 | Percentages | Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities | |
| Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages | |||
| 35 | Algebraic expressions | Algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand. | |||
| 36 | Algebraic expressions | Substitution into algebraic expressions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations. | |||
| 37 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: addition and subtraction. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals. | |||
| 38 | Algebraic expressions | Directed numbers: multiplication and division. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer. | |||
| 39 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms. | |||
| 40 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction. | |||
| 41 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes. | |||
| 42 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form. | |||
| 43 | Algebraic expressions | Simplifying algebraic expressions: division | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions. | |||
| 44 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step. | |||
| 45 | Geometry-angles | Vertically opposite angles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 46 | Geometry-angles | Angles at a Point. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems. | |||
| 47 | Geometry-angles | Parallel Lines. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles. | |||
| 48 | Geometry-problems | Additional questions involving parallel lines | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them. | |||
| 49 | Geometry-triangles | Angle sum of a triangle | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems. | |||
| 50 | Geometry-triangles | Exterior angle theorem | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the exterior angle of a triangle theorem to solve geometric questions. | |||
| 51 | Special triangles | Special triangles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles. | |||
| 52 | Geometry-quadrilaterals | Quadrilaterals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees. | |||
| 53 | Statistics | Frequency distribution table | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table. | |||
| 54 | Statistics | Frequency histograms and polygons | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons. | |||
| 55 | Statistics | Relative frequency | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data. | |||
| 56 | Statistics | The range. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table. | |||
| 57 | Geometry-constructions | Geometric constructions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses. | |||
| 58 | Geometry problems | More difficult exercises involving parallel lines | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles in questions that are more difficult than previously completed. Students will also learn to use other geometric properties as well as set out log | |||
| 59 | Geometry-reasoning | Further difficult exercises involving formal reasoning | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which geometric properties are needed to complete a question and be able to use formal reasoning to write out this information. | |||
| 60 | Functions and graphs | Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis. | |||
| 61 | Factorising | Expansions leading to the difference of two squares | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand expansions leading to differences of 2 squares. | |||
| 62 | Difference of 2 squares | Difference of two squares | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors. | |||
| 63 | Common fact and diff | Common factor and the difference of two squares | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares. | |||
| 64 | Quadratic trinomials | Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive. | |||
| 65 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier. | |||
| 66 | Algebraic expressions | Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions. | |||
| 67 | Algebraic equations | Solving two step equations | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations. | |||
| 68 | Algebraic equations | Solving equations containing binomial expressions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations. | |||
| 69 | Algebraic equations | Equations involving grouping symbols. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols | |||
| 70 | Algebraic equations | Equations involving fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions. | |||
| 71 | Algebra-inequalities | Solving Inequalities. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities. | |||
| 72 | Algebra-factorising | Simplifying easy algebraic fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising. | |||
| 73 | Trigonometry-ratios | Trigonometric ratios. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op | |||
| 74 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the calculator. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles. | |||
| 75 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances. | |||
| 76 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle. | |||
| 77 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle. | |||
| 78 | Trigonometry-compass | Bearings – the compass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north. | |||
| 79 | Trigonometry-practical | Trigonometric ratios in practical situations. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation. | |||
| 80 | Exam | Exam – Leaving Cert Foundation 5th Year | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Leaving Cert Ordinary 5th Year Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Leaving Cert Ordinary 5th Year | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Area | Area of a trapezium. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula. | |||
| 3 | Area | Area of a rhombus. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems. | |||
| 4 | Area | Area of a circle. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle. | |||
| 5 | Area | Area of regular polygons and composite figures. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 6 | Volume | Finding the volume of prisms | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume. | |||
| 7 | Volume | Volume of a cylinder and sphere. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume. | |||
| 8 | Volume | Volume of pyramids and cones. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones. | |||
| 9 | Volume | Composite solids. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately. | |||
| 10 | Fractions | Finding equivalent fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines. | |||
| 11 | Fractions | Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form. | |||
| 12 | Fractions | Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor. | |||
| 13 | Fractions | Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one. | |||
| 14 | Fractions | Subtracting fractions from whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from | |||
| 15 | Fractions | Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions with the same denominator. | |||
| 16 | Fractions | Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other. | |||
| 17 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions by whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers. | |||
| 18 | Fractions | Fractions of whole numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection. | |||
| 19 | Fractions | Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 20 | Fractions | Dividing fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions. | |||
| 21 | Fractions | Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals) | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals). | |||
| 22 | Fractions | Multiplying fractions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form. | |||
| 23 | Area | Problems with area. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area. | |||
| 24 | Surface area | Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 25 | Surface area | Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 26 | Surface area | Surface area of a cylinder and sphere. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 27 | Surface area | Surface area of pyramids | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids. | |||
| 28 | Surface area | Surface area of cones | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul | |||
| 29 | Surface area | Surface area of composite solids | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids. | |||
| 30 | Algebra- formulae | Changing the subject of the formula. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously. | |||
| 31 | Algebra-inequalities | Solving Inequalities. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities. | |||
| 32 | Algebraic fractions | Simplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies. | |||
| 33 | Algebra-negative indices | Algebraic fractions resulting in negative indices. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index. | |||
| 34 | Factorisation | Factorisation of algebraic fractions including binomials. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to simplify more complex algebraic fractions using a variety of methods. | |||
| 35 | Algebraic fractions-binomial | Cancelling binomial factors in algebraic fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to factorise binomials to simplify fractions. | |||
| 36 | Rules for indices/exponents | Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base. | |||
| 37 | Rules for indices/exponents | Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base. | |||
| 38 | Rules for indices/exponents | Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power. | |||
| 39 | Rules for indices/exponents | Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power. | |||
| 40 | Rules for indices/exponents | Terms raised to the power of zero | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero. | |||
| 41 | Rules for indices/exponents | Negative Indices | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices. | |||
| 42 | Fractional indices/exponents | Fractional indices | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices. | |||
| 43 | Fractional indices/exponents | Complex fractions as indices | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing complex fractional indices. | |||
| 44 | Scientific notation | Scientific notation with larger numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation. | |||
| 45 | Scientific notation | Scientific notation with small numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation. | |||
| 46 | Scientific notation | Changing scientific notation to numerals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation. | |||
| 47 | Significant figures | Significant figures | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures. | |||
| 48 | Special triangles | Special triangles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles. | |||
| 49 | Similar triangles | Similar triangles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar. | |||
| 50 | Similar triangles | Using similar triangles to calculate lengths | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles. | |||
| 51 | Overlapping triangles | Examples involving overlapping triangles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles. | |||
| 52 | Surds | Introducing surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers. | |||
| 53 | Surds | Some rules for the operations with surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for division and multiplication of surds. | |||
| 54 | Surds | Simplifying surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for simplifying surds using division and multiplication. | |||
| 55 | Surds | Creating entire surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write numbers as entire surds and compare numbers by writing as entire surds | |||
| 56 | Surds | Adding and subtracting like surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract surds and simplify expressions by collecting like surds. | |||
| 57 | Surds | Expanding surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and then simplify binomial expressions involving surds. | |||
| 58 | Surds | Binomial expansions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify the squares of binomial sums and differences involving surds. | |||
| 59 | Surds | Conjugate binomials with surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify conjugate binomial expressions involving surds. | |||
| 60 | Surds | Rationalising the denominator | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves surds. | |||
| 61 | Surds | Rationalising binomial denominators | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves binomial expressions. | |||
| 62 | Simultaneous equns | Simultaneous equations | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method. | |||
| 63 | Simultaneous equns | Elimination method | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method. | |||
| 64 | Simultaneous equns | Elimination method part 2 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method. | |||
| 65 | Simultaneous equns | Applications of simultaneous equations | |
| Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations. | |||
| 66 | Geometry-circles | The equation of a circle: to find radii of circles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe a circle mathematically given its equation or its graph. Additionally, the student will be able to work out the equation of a circle given its centre and radius. | |||
| 67 | Geometry-circles | The semicircle: to select the equation given the semi circle and vice versa | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to sketch a semicircle given its equation and derive the equation of a given semicircle. | |||
| 68 | Geometry-parabola | The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions. | |||
| 69 | Functions and graphs | Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis. | |||
| 70 | Functions and graphs | Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve. | |||
| 71 | Algebra-highest common factor | Highest common factor. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of turning a simple algebraic expression into the product of a factor in parentheses and identifying the highest common factors of the whole expression. | |||
| 72 | Factors by grouping | Factors by grouping. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression. | |||
| 73 | Difference of 2 squares | Difference of two squares | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors. | |||
| 74 | Common fact and diff | Common factor and the difference of two squares | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares. | |||
| 75 | Quadratic trinomials | Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive. | |||
| 76 | Algebraic fractions | Simplifying algebraic fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be familiar with all of the factorisation methods presented to this point. | |||
| 77 | Trigonometry-ratios | Trigonometric ratios. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op | |||
| 78 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the calculator. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles. | |||
| 79 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances. | |||
| 80 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle. | |||
| 81 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle. | |||
| 82 | Trigonometry-ratios | Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown. | |||
| 83 | Trigonometry-compass | Bearings – the compass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north. | |||
| 84 | Trigonometry-elevation | Angles of elevation and depression. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them. | |||
| 85 | Trigonometry-practical | Trigonometric ratios in practical situations. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation. | |||
| 86 | Coordinate Geometry-gradient | Gradient | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run. | |||
| 87 | Coordinate Geometry-gradient | Gradient formula. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines. | |||
| 88 | Coordinate Geometry-straight line | The straight line. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists. | |||
| 89 | Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. | Lines through the origin. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems. | |||
| 90 | Coordinate Geometry-equation of line | General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa. | |||
| 91 | Coordinate Geometry-intercept | Slope intercept form of a line. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation. | |||
| 92 | Coordinate Geometry-point slope | Point slope form of a line | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line. | |||
| 93 | Sequences and Series-Compound interest | Compound interest | |
| Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods. | |||
| 94 | Sequences and Series-Superannuation | Superannuation. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P. | |||
| 95 | Sequences and Series-Time payments | Time payments. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan. | |||
| 96 | Exam | Exam – Leaving Cert Ordinary 5th Year | |
| Objective: Exam | |||
Go to top
Leaving Cert Higher 5th Year Mathematics
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Study Plan | Study plan – Leaving Cert Higher 5th Year | |
| Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision. | |||
| 2 | Surface area | Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 3 | Surface area | Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 4 | Surface area | Surface area of a cylinder and sphere. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula. | |||
| 5 | Surface area | Surface area of pyramids | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids. | |||
| 6 | Surface area | Surface area of cones | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul | |||
| 7 | Surface area | Surface area of composite solids | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids. | |||
| 8 | Algebra-inequalities | Solving Inequalities. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities. | |||
| 9 | Algebraic fractions | Simplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies. | |||
| 10 | Algebra-negative indices | Algebraic fractions resulting in negative indices. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index. | |||
| 11 | Factorisation | Factorisation of algebraic fractions including binomials. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to simplify more complex algebraic fractions using a variety of methods. | |||
| 12 | Algebraic fractions-binomial | Cancelling binomial factors in algebraic fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to factorise binomials to simplify fractions. | |||
| 13 | Rules for indices/exponents | Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base. | |||
| 14 | Rules for indices/exponents | Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base. | |||
| 15 | Rules for indices/exponents | Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power. | |||
| 16 | Rules for indices/exponents | Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power. | |||
| 17 | Rules for indices/exponents | Terms raised to the power of zero | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero. | |||
| 18 | Rules for indices/exponents | Negative Indices | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices. | |||
| 19 | Fractional indices/exponents | Fractional indices | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices. | |||
| 20 | Fractional indices/exponents | Complex fractions as indices | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing complex fractional indices. | |||
| 21 | Scientific notation | Scientific notation with larger numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation. | |||
| 22 | Scientific notation | Scientific notation with small numbers | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation. | |||
| 23 | Scientific notation | Changing scientific notation to numerals | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation. | |||
| 24 | Significant figures | Significant figures | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures. | |||
| 25 | Similar triangles | Similar triangles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar. | |||
| 26 | Similar triangles | Using similar triangles to calculate lengths | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles. | |||
| 27 | Overlapping triangles | Examples involving overlapping triangles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles. | |||
| 28 | Surds | Introducing surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers. | |||
| 29 | Surds | Some rules for the operations with surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for division and multiplication of surds. | |||
| 30 | Surds | Simplifying surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for simplifying surds using division and multiplication. | |||
| 31 | Surds | Creating entire surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write numbers as entire surds and compare numbers by writing as entire surds | |||
| 32 | Surds | Adding and subtracting like surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract surds and simplify expressions by collecting like surds. | |||
| 33 | Surds | Expanding surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and then simplify binomial expressions involving surds. | |||
| 34 | Surds | Binomial expansions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify the squares of binomial sums and differences involving surds. | |||
| 35 | Surds | Conjugate binomials with surds | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify conjugate binomial expressions involving surds. | |||
| 36 | Surds | Rationalising the denominator | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves surds. | |||
| 37 | Surds | Rationalising binomial denominators | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves binomial expressions. | |||
| 38 | Simultaneous equns | Simultaneous equations | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method. | |||
| 39 | Simultaneous equns | Elimination method | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method. | |||
| 40 | Simultaneous equns | Elimination method part 2 | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method. | |||
| 41 | Simultaneous equns | Applications of simultaneous equations | |
| Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations. | |||
| 42 | Geometry-circles | The equation of a circle: to find radii of circles | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe a circle mathematically given its equation or its graph. Additionally, the student will be able to work out the equation of a circle given its centre and radius. | |||
| 43 | Geometry-circles | The semicircle: to select the equation given the semi circle and vice versa | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to sketch a semicircle given its equation and derive the equation of a given semicircle. | |||
| 44 | Geometry-parabola | The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions. | |||
| 45 | Algebraic expressions-products | Products in simplification of algebraic expressions | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simplification of algebraic expressions in step-by-step processing. | |||
| 46 | Algebra-highest common factor | Highest common factor. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of turning a simple algebraic expression into the product of a factor in parentheses and identifying the highest common factors of the whole expression. | |||
| 47 | Factors by grouping | Factors by grouping. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression. | |||
| 48 | Difference of 2 squares | Difference of two squares | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors. | |||
| 49 | Common fact and diff | Common factor and the difference of two squares | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares. | |||
| 50 | Quadratic trinomials | Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive. | |||
| 51 | Algebraic fractions | Simplifying algebraic fractions. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be familiar with all of the factorisation methods presented to this point. | |||
| 52 | Trigonometry-ratios | Trigonometric ratios. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op | |||
| 53 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the calculator. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles. | |||
| 54 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances. | |||
| 55 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle. | |||
| 56 | Trigonometry-ratios | Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle. | |||
| 57 | Trigonometry-ratios | Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4]. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown. | |||
| 58 | Trigonometry-compass | Bearings – the compass. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north. | |||
| 59 | Trigonometry-elevation | Angles of elevation and depression. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them. | |||
| 60 | Trigonometry-practical | Trigonometric ratios in practical situations. | |
| Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometri | |||
Go to top
Kindergarten/Year 1 Literacy
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Do you like hamburgers? | It’s the alphabet! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their listening skills and practise saying the alphabet. | ||||
| 2 | It’s time to learn your A B C! | The Alphabet! Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: Students will practise reading the letters of the alphabet and practise recognition of: a, b, c, d, e, f. | ||||
| 3 | Hello! How are you? | Hello! I’m Lulu. | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which they will meet some new friends. | ||||
| 4 | Hello! How are you? | My name is Jack! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which new friends and new vocabulary are introduced. | ||||
| 5 | Eight Purple Stars! | Ten Little Pandas Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: Students will read a picture story and practise the numbers 1-10. | ||||
| 6 | Eight Purple Stars! | What colour is it? | ||
| Objective: Students will read and practise the words for basic colours. They will learn to answer the question: ‘What colour is …?’ and reply with ‘It’s …’. | ||||
| 7 | Fun at School | This is my father and mother. | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their reading skills. They will read a picture story and become familiar with ‘This is …’ and ‘That is …’. | ||||
| 8 | What’s this? | It’s my green eraser! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which some possessive pronouns are used. They will also become familiar with the questions: ‘What’s this?’ and ‘What’s that?’. | ||||
| 9 | What’s this? | What’s in the box? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will learn to ask and answer the question ‘Is it a …?’. | ||||
| 10 | A New Boy at School | A Letter from Peter | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also revise colours and numbers, and learn to talk about their families. | ||||
| 11 | A New Boy at School | Where’s my dog? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with some prepositions. | ||||
| 12 | My Family | Where’s the red kite? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading and listening to a picture story. They will also practise the use of ‘in’, ‘on’ and ‘under’. | ||||
| 13 | My Family | My Family Tree | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about the family. They will increase their vocabulary for family relationships and occupations, and they will learn to use ‘this’ and ‘that’. | ||||
| 14 | About People | That’s his cow! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about occupations. They will also learn about the possessive adjectives ‘his’, ‘her’ and ‘their’. | ||||
| 15 | About People | These are my feet. | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills and vocabulary by reading a text about the parts of the body. They will practise using ‘this’ and ‘these’, and learn to form plurals. | ||||
| 16 | Animal Mania! | What animal is that? Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about animals. Students will practise asking and answering questions, and they will revise colours and numbers. | ||||
| 17 | Animal Mania! | A Very Tall Giraffe | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about animals in which more adjectives are used. | ||||
| 18 | We like to play games. | Holidays! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about fun activities to do in the holidays. Students will practise using ‘let’s’ and learn the days of the week. | ||||
| 19 | We like to play games. | What’s your favourite? Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about activities they like to do. They will learn to talk about their preferences. | ||||
| 20 | Do you like hamburgers? | At a Café | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about food preferences. | ||||
| 21 | Do you like hamburgers? | This is Bobby. | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story. They will also learn to ask questions about likes and dislikes. | ||||
| 22 | It’s time to learn your A B C! | It’s time! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text about asking and telling the time on the hour and half hour. | ||||
| 23 | It’s time to learn how to tell the time! | No school! It’s Sunday! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short text about daily routines. | ||||
| 24 | It’s time to learn how to tell the time! | Where are my clothes? | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short text about items of clothing. They will learn about the prepositions – ‘on’, ‘under’, ‘in’. | ||||
| 25 | Sentences | The Sentence | ||
| Objective: To identify and use complete sentences. | ||||
Go to top
Year 2 Literacy
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | It’s time to learn your A B C! | It’s time! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text about asking and telling the time on the hour and half hour. | ||||
| 2 | It’s time to learn how to tell the time! | No school! It’s Sunday! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short text about daily routines. | ||||
| 3 | It’s time to learn how to tell the time! | Where are my clothes? | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short text about items of clothing. They will learn about the prepositions – ‘on’, ‘under’, ‘in’. | ||||
| 4 | School and Play | I have lots of subjects! Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: Students will practise reading, and saying words and simple sentences to describe school subjects and the days of the week. | ||||
| 5 | School and Play | On the Weekend | ||
| Objective: Students will practise reading and recognising simple sentences about weekend activities. | ||||
| 6 | It’s Christmas time! | It’s time for Maths! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text in which quarter past, quarter to, 5 past, 5 to, 10 past and 10 to the hour are used. | ||||
| 7 | It’s Christmas time! | Festivals are fun! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text about Christmas and Chinese New Year. | ||||
| 8 | I walk in the summer. | The Seasons | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and practise new words to describe the seasons. | ||||
| 9 | I walk in the summer. | How do you go to school? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and practise new words that describe modes of transport. They will also ask and answer questions about transport to different places. | ||||
| 10 | What’s the weather like today? | It’s a sunny day! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story about the weather. | ||||
| 11 | What are you doing now? | Shhhh! Dad is sleeping! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used. | ||||
| 12 | What are you doing now? | We are having a picnic! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used to ask and answer questions. | ||||
| 13 | They’re usually in the lounge room. | Hide and Seek | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story about finding people. | ||||
| 14 | They’re usually in the lounge room. | An Unusual Day | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the simple present and the continuous present tenses are used. They will also learn the little words that help to sequence a story. | ||||
| 15 | Left! Right! Let’s go! | Where’s the shop? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which simple directions are given using the imperative. | ||||
| 16 | Left! Right! Let’s go! | Ladies and Gentlemen! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used to talk about a concert. | ||||
| 17 | Up, down and around we go! | Roller-coaster Ride | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which routes are described using the present continuous tense. | ||||
| 18 | Up, down and around we go! | Catch that car! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story which focuses on street directions and places. | ||||
| 19 | Sentences | The Sentence | ||
| Objective: To identify and use complete sentences. | ||||
| 20 | Spelling | Spelling | ||
| Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words. | ||||
| 21 | Capitalisation | Capital Letters 1 | ||
| Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns. | ||||
| 22 | Vowels and Consonants | Vowels and Consonants | ||
| Objective: To identify and use vowels and consonants. | ||||
| 23 | Common Nouns | Common Nouns | ||
| Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing. | ||||
| 24 | Punctuation | Sentence Endings | ||
| Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly. | ||||
| 25 | Verbs | Simple Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership. | ||||
Go to top
Year 3 Literacy
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | We’re very busy. | Fast Food | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading what Peter and Chen say about fast food. They will also practise using the present tense, and asking and answering questions using ‘do’. | ||||
| 2 | We’re very busy. | On the farm Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading, in which the present continuous tense is used. | ||||
| 3 | I can’t do that! | This is a great park! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a story about a park. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘this’ and ‘these’ for things that are near and ‘that’ and ‘those’ for things that are far away. | ||||
| 4 | I can’t do that! | I can speak English! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short speech about what a person ‘can’ and ‘can’t’ do. | ||||
| 5 | Can I look at your new kite? | Can I help you? | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text using ‘can’ and ‘can’t’ to make offers and requests. | ||||
| 6 | Oh, no! Not the Doctor! | Doctor, what have I got? | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text about illnesses. | ||||
| 7 | Oh, no! Not the Doctor! | There is a zoo in Sydney! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘There is’ and ‘There are’ in relation to zoo animals is used. | ||||
| 8 | It’s all in the future! | One World, One Dream | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘going to’ is used to talk about the future. | ||||
| 9 | It’s all in the future! | You are going to have a great time! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘going to’ is used to make future plans. | ||||
| 10 | Maybe she’ll be funny! | My animal friends are wonderful! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will revise adjectives that describe personality. | ||||
| 11 | Maybe she’ll be funny! | What will Fido do next? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘will’ to express a future action. | ||||
| 12 | First we’ll see a big city. | Sydney: It’s special! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will focus on the use of adjectives to describe cities. | ||||
| 13 | First we’ll see a big city. | Then we’ll eat it! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘will’ when describing a process. | ||||
| 14 | We need to take a metal pan. | What’s it made of? Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about what things are made of. They will also revise prepositions of location. | ||||
| 15 | We need to take a metal pan. | They want to go camping. | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about a camping trip. They will also become familiar with the terms ‘need to’ and ‘want to’. | ||||
| 16 | First we’ll go to the eighth floor. | Let’s make pancakes! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, an illustrated recipe. They will also revise words that help them tell a story – ‘First’, ‘Then’, ‘Next’, ‘After that’ and ‘Finally’. | ||||
| 17 | First we’ll go to the eighth floor. | Who’s shopping at Sunsets? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about shopping in a department store. They will also revise some prepositions and learn some more in simple phrases. | ||||
| 18 | On Monday I’ll buy new jeans. | Whose Shoes? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture poem about shopping. They will also revise colours and pronouns. | ||||
| 19 | On Monday I’ll buy new jeans. | Chen’s Holiday Plans | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short story about Chen’s plans for his holidays. They will also practise verbs. | ||||
| 20 | Sentences | The Sentence | ||
| Objective: To identify and use complete sentences. | ||||
| 21 | Spelling | Spelling | ||
| Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words. | ||||
| 22 | Capitalisation | Capital Letters 1 | ||
| Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns. | ||||
| 23 | Vowels and Consonants | Vowels and Consonants | ||
| Objective: To identify and use vowels and consonants. | ||||
| 24 | Common Nouns | Common Nouns | ||
| Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing. | ||||
| 25 | Punctuation | Sentence Endings | ||
| Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly. | ||||
| 26 | Verbs | Simple Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership. | ||||
| 27 | Vowels | Vowels – Long and Short | ||
| Objective: To identify long and short vowel sounds, and their use. | ||||
| 28 | Plurals | Plurals 1 – simple | ||
| Objective: To form plurals (more than one) by adding ‘s’ and ‘es’ correctly. | ||||
| 29 | Basic Dictionary Use | Basic Dictionary Use | ||
| Objective: To find words arranged alphabetically and identify word meanings in dictionaries. | ||||
| 30 | Nouns | Proper Nouns | ||
| Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title. | ||||
| 31 | Adjectives | Adjectives | ||
| Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun. | ||||
| 32 | Adverbs | Adverbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb. | ||||
| 33 | Pronouns | Pronouns | ||
| Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun. | ||||
| 34 | Parts of Speech Part b | Conjunctions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly. | ||||
| 35 | Common Errors | Common Errors in spelling and punctuation | ||
| Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors. | ||||
| 36 | Punctuation | Commas 1 | ||
| Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date. | ||||
| 37 | Contractions | Contractions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use contractions. | ||||
| 38 | Other Places and Other Times | A New Penfriend | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehensions skills by reading a letter of introduction to a penfriend. They will also practise the present continuous tense and become familiar with vocabulary about different nationalities. | ||||
| 39 | Other Places and Other Times | Will we have robots? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the future tense is used. | ||||
| 40 | It was different yesterday. | We all change. | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, particularly adjectives, and develop their reading skills. They will practise using the verb’ to be’ in the present and past tenses. | ||||
Go to top
Year 4 Literacy
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | It was different yesterday. | Kate worked hard! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, particularly adjectives, and develop their reading skills. They will also practise using the simple past tense. | ||||
| 2 | We learned about another culture. | Guess who we met today! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills. They will also practise using the simple past tense of irregular verbs. | ||||
| 3 | We learned about another culture. | How the world was made! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills. They will also learn to identify some storytelling words and narrative structures. | ||||
| 4 | They won! | Australian Boy Wins! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their comprehension skills by reading a newspaper report. They will also practise using the ‘why/because’ structure. | ||||
| 5 | They won! | Always be honest! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their comprehension skills by reading a fable in which the simple past tense of regular and irregular verbs is used. | ||||
| 6 | There was an accident! | A Police Report | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a simple report about an accident in which the simple past tense is used. | ||||
| 7 | There was an accident! | I feel sick! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a narrative about a visit to the doctor. | ||||
| 8 | Let’s compare! | A Maths Lesson | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will focus on the use of comparative adjectives. | ||||
| 9 | Let’s compare! | Be careful! They’re dangerous! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which instructions are given using the imperative. They will also learn more comparative adjectives. | ||||
| 10 | A New CD Player | The Perfect CD Player | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which comparative adjectives are used. | ||||
| 11 | A New CD Player | Which do you prefer? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story about preferences. | ||||
| 12 | That’s a great idea! | A Visit to the Art Gallery | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which irregular comparative adjectives are used. | ||||
| 13 | That’s a great idea! | That’s a great idea! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which plans for an activity are made. | ||||
| 14 | Let’s find out! | About the Stars | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which superlative adjectives are used and facts are given. | ||||
| 15 | Let’s find out! | Two Great Countries | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which China and Australia are described and compared. | ||||
| 16 | The Most Beautiful Planet | This is my country. Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about two countries. They will also practise using superlative adjectives. | ||||
| 17 | The Most Beautiful Planet | When the rain stops! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which ‘going to’ and ‘will’ are used to talk about future plans. | ||||
| 18 | Capitalisation | Capital Letters 1 | ||
| Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns. | ||||
| 19 | Common Nouns | Common Nouns | ||
| Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing. | ||||
| 20 | Punctuation | Sentence Endings | ||
| Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly. | ||||
| 21 | Verbs | Simple Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership. | ||||
| 22 | Vowels | Vowels – Long and Short | ||
| Objective: To identify long and short vowel sounds, and their use. | ||||
| 23 | Plurals | Plurals 1 – simple | ||
| Objective: To form plurals (more than one) by adding ‘s’ and ‘es’ correctly. | ||||
| 24 | Basic Dictionary Use | Basic Dictionary Use | ||
| Objective: To find words arranged alphabetically and identify word meanings in dictionaries. | ||||
| 25 | Nouns | Proper Nouns | ||
| Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title. | ||||
| 26 | Adjectives | Adjectives | ||
| Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun. | ||||
| 27 | Adverbs | Adverbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb. | ||||
| 28 | Pronouns | Pronouns | ||
| Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun. | ||||
| 29 | Parts of Speech Part b | Conjunctions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly. | ||||
| 30 | Punctuation | Commas 1 | ||
| Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date. | ||||
| 31 | Contractions | Contractions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use contractions. | ||||
| 32 | There weren’t many … | There weren’t any flowers! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using the simple past tense of the verb ‘to be’. | ||||
| 33 | There weren’t many … | A Shopping List | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise asking questions using ‘How much …’ and ‘How many …’. | ||||
| 34 | It couldn’t be mine! | Uncle Bill said we could! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using ‘could’ and ‘couldn’t’ to refer to past events. | ||||
| 35 | It couldn’t be mine! | The Riding Lesson | ||
| Objective: Students will build vocabulary, answer comprehension questions and practise using possessive pronouns and adjectives. | ||||
| 36 | Clean up Australia! | Too much rubbish! | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and reading comprehension skills. They will also practise using ‘too much’, ‘too many’ and ‘enough’. | ||||
| 37 | Clean up Australia! | Sports Report | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and reading comprehension skills. They will also practise using the adverbs ‘well’ and ‘badly’. | ||||
| 38 | Friends all over the World | Now I can do it by myself. | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills. They will practise using ‘too much’, ‘too many’ and ‘enough’. | ||||
| 39 | Friends all over the World | A Letter to a Pen Pal | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their comprehension skills and practise using the simple present tense. | ||||
| 40 | What’s the problem? | What’s the matter? | ||
| Objective: Students will read and comprehend a passage in which words are used to describe feelings. | ||||
Go to top
Year 5 Literacy
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | What’s the problem? | A School Outing | ||
| Objective: Students will read and comprehend a notice. They will learn about the use of ‘should’ and ‘shouldn’t’. | ||||
| 2 | When I was Young | Life used to be different. | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, an interview. They will learn how to describe finished activities using ‘used to’. | ||||
| 3 | When I was Young | Have you tidied your room? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a rhyme. They will also learn the imperfect tense and its use. | ||||
| 4 | Space and Time | We’ve done our research. Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will learn some irregular verbs in the present perfect tense. | ||||
| 5 | Space and Time | We’ve written a poem! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a rhyme. They will learn more irregular verbs in the present perfect tense. | ||||
| 6 | Choices and Places | A New Jacket | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which preferences are discussed and comparisons are made. | ||||
| 7 | Choices and Places | He has travelled a lot. | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the present perfect and the simple past tenses are used. | ||||
| 8 | What’s the best way to do it? | A Text Message | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text which focuses on the use of ‘have to’ and adverbs of time. | ||||
| 9 | What’s the best way to do it? | What will we make? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the children discuss a project. | ||||
| 10 | Class Camp | Dear Parents, … | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a letter which uses a variety of verb tenses. | ||||
| 11 | Class Camp | A Postcard from Kate | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading an informal letter in which the simple past tense of the verb is used. | ||||
| 12 | Sentences | The Sentence | ||
| Objective: To identify and use complete sentences. | ||||
| 13 | Capitalisation | Capital Letters 1 | ||
| Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns. | ||||
| 14 | Common Nouns | Common Nouns | ||
| Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing. | ||||
| 15 | Punctuation | Sentence Endings | ||
| Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly. | ||||
| 16 | Verbs | Simple Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership. | ||||
| 17 | Basic Dictionary Use | Basic Dictionary Use | ||
| Objective: To find words arranged alphabetically and identify word meanings in dictionaries. | ||||
| 18 | Nouns | Proper Nouns | ||
| Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title. | ||||
| 19 | Adjectives | Adjectives | ||
| Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun. | ||||
| 20 | Adverbs | Adverbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb. | ||||
| 21 | Pronouns | Pronouns | ||
| Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun. | ||||
| 22 | Parts of Speech Part b | Conjunctions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly. | ||||
| 23 | Punctuation | Commas 1 | ||
| Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date. | ||||
| 24 | Contractions | Contractions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use contractions. | ||||
| 25 | Parts of Speech Part h | Articles and Demonstratives | ||
| Objective: To identify and use articles and demonstratives correctly. | ||||
| 26 | Antonyms and Synonyms | Antonyms and Synonyms | ||
| Objective: To identify and use antonyms and synonyms. | ||||
| 27 | Spelling Skills | Spelling | ||
| Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’. | ||||
| 28 | Spelling Skills | Syllabification | ||
| Objective: To improve spelling by dividing words correctly into syllables. | ||||
| 29 | Plurals | Plurals 2 – special rules | ||
| Objective: To form plurals with special rules: words ending in ‘y’ and ‘f’. | ||||
| 30 | Nouns | Collective and Abstract Nouns | ||
| Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns. | ||||
| 31 | Verbs | Verbs – Tense | ||
| Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future. | ||||
| 32 | Adjectives | Adjectives – Comparatives and Superlatives | ||
| Objective: To identify and use comparative and superlative adjectives. | ||||
| 33 | Parts of Speech Part a | Prepositions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly. | ||||
| 34 | Punctuation Skills Part b | Quotation Marks | ||
| Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech. | ||||
| 35 | Common Errors | Common Errors in writing | ||
| Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors. | ||||
| 36 | Apostrophe – Possession | Apostrophe – Possession | ||
| Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly. | ||||
| 37 | Mnemonics | Spelling – Mnemonics | ||
| Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling. | ||||
| 38 | Prefixes | Prefixes | ||
| Objective: The identify and use prefixes. | ||||
| 39 | Suffixes | Suffixes | ||
| Objective: The identify and use suffixes. | ||||
| 40 | Similes and Metaphors | Similes and Metaphors | ||
| Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors. | ||||
| 41 | Figurative Language | Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration | ||
| Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration. | ||||
| 42 | Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs | Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs. | ||||
| 43 | Advanced Dictionary Use | Advanced Dictionary Use | ||
| Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus. | ||||
| 44 | Capitalisation | Capital Letters 2 | ||
| Objective: To use capital letters correctly: in titles and letters. | ||||
| 45 | Adjectives | Adjectives – from Nouns and Verbs | ||
| Objective: To create adjectives from nouns and verbs. E.g. China – Chinese | ||||
| 46 | There’s a … | It’s famous! Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using the verb ‘to be’. | ||||
| 47 | There’s a … | There are lots of things in my town. | ||
| Objective: Students will increase their reading comprehension skills and their vocabulary. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘There is …’ and ‘There are …’. | ||||
| 48 | Hobbies and Festivals | Collecting things | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and increase their vocabulary. They will learn the verb ‘to have’. They will also learn to use ‘this’ and ‘these’ correctly. | ||||
| 49 | Hobbies and Festivals | My favourite festival | ||
| Objective: Students will build vocabulary; begin to use conjunctions ‘and’, ‘but’ or ‘because’. | ||||
| 50 | What can you do? | Letter to a penfriend | ||
| Objective: Students will be able to read and understand an informal letter and use the present tense of ‘can’ and ‘can’t’. | ||||
| 51 | What’s Homestay? | Simple Present | ||
| Objective: Learn the correct structure for the simple present. | ||||
| 52 | What’s Homestay? | Simple Past | ||
| Objective: Learn the correct structure for the past simple. | ||||
| 53 | Setting off | Present perfect | ||
| Objective: Learn the correct structure for the present perfect. | ||||
| 54 | Here we are! | Adjectives | ||
| Objective: Learn the use of adjectives. | ||||
| 55 | Here we are! | Comparatives and superlatives | ||
| Objective: Learn how to use comparatives and superlatives in English. | ||||
| 56 | A new home | Prepositions of location | ||
| Objective: Learn about prepositions of location. | ||||
| 57 | Let’s hit the beach! | Modals of obligation | ||
| Objective: Learn about modals of obligation. | ||||
| 58 | Amazing Aussie animals | Present continuous | ||
| Objective: Learn about the present continuous tense. | ||||
| 59 | Amazing Aussie animals | Past continuous | ||
| Objective: Learn about the past continuous tense. | ||||
| 60 | Amazing Aussie animals | Giving facts and opinions | ||
| Objective: Present phrases that ask for and give opinions. | ||||
Go to top
Year 6 Literacy
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | A visit to the Zoo | About Koalas | ||
| Objective: Students will be able to answer questions about the text, identify the target language point ‘like’ + the infinitive) and distinguish between simple facts and opinions. | ||||
| 2 | A visit to the Zoo | I’m a zookeeper. | ||
| Objective: Students will be able to answer comprehension questions on reading, increase their vocabulary and use the frequency adverbs, ‘always’, ‘sometimes’, ‘often’ and ‘never’. | ||||
| 3 | What do you want to do? | Big Dreams | ||
| Objective: Students will be able to answer comprehension questions, increase their vocabulary and be able to use ‘want’ + the infinitive in positive and negative sentences, and in a question. | ||||
| 4 | What do you want to do? | Fruit Bowl | ||
| Objective: Students will be able to read and understand the text, to answer questions and to notice the use of the imperative form. | ||||
| 5 | It’s going to be fun! | It’s going to be fantastic! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a story. They will learn how to talk about the future using the verb ‘to go + the infinitive’. | ||||
| 6 | It’s going to be fun! | What’s on the menu? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading various menus. They will also learn to ask questions politely. | ||||
| 7 | We are all doing things! | I’m having a great time! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a letter which focuses on the use of the present continuous tense. | ||||
| 8 | We are all doing things! | Who can help me? | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which requests for help are made. | ||||
| 9 | To Australia and Back! | Getting There! Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about travel plans. They will also learn about coordinate conjunctions. | ||||
| 10 | To Australia and Back! | I came back! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which Chen talks about going home to China. They will also revise the simple past tense. | ||||
| 11 | Famous People | Bruce Lee | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about Bruce Lee. They will also practise the use of the simple past tense and learn more irregular verbs. | ||||
| 12 | Famous People | Alexander Bell | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about Alexander Bell. They will also learn how to use ‘could’ and ‘couldn’t’, and review questions using ‘Wh’ words. | ||||
| 13 | Finding Buster! | Finding Buster! – A Movie Review | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehension skills and increase their vocabulary by reading a movie review. They will also learn how to use the conjunction ‘because’ to answer ‘why’ questions. | ||||
| 14 | Finding Buster! | I’m going to be busy! | ||
| Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehension skills by reading a story about plans for the weekend. They will revise the use of the verb ‘to go’ in the present tense + the infinitive to talk about the future. | ||||
| 15 | Sentences | The Sentence | ||
| Objective: To identify and use complete sentences. | ||||
| 16 | Common Nouns | Common Nouns | ||
| Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing. | ||||
| 17 | Nouns | Proper Nouns | ||
| Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title. | ||||
| 18 | Adjectives | Adjectives | ||
| Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun. | ||||
| 19 | Adverbs | Adverbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb. | ||||
| 20 | Pronouns | Pronouns | ||
| Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun. | ||||
| 21 | Parts of Speech Part b | Conjunctions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly. | ||||
| 22 | Parts of Speech Part h | Articles and Demonstratives | ||
| Objective: To identify and use articles and demonstratives correctly. | ||||
| 23 | Antonyms and Synonyms | Antonyms and Synonyms | ||
| Objective: To identify and use antonyms and synonyms. | ||||
| 24 | Spelling Skills | Syllabification | ||
| Objective: To improve spelling by dividing words correctly into syllables. | ||||
| 25 | Plurals | Plurals 1 – simple | ||
| Objective: To form plurals (more than one) by adding ‘s’ and ‘es’ correctly. | ||||
| 26 | Plurals | Plurals 2 – special rules | ||
| Objective: To form plurals with special rules: words ending in ‘y’ and ‘f’. | ||||
| 27 | Nouns | Collective and Abstract Nouns | ||
| Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns. | ||||
| 28 | Verbs | Verbs – Tense | ||
| Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future. | ||||
| 29 | Adjectives | Adjectives – Comparatives and Superlatives | ||
| Objective: To identify and use comparative and superlative adjectives. | ||||
| 30 | Parts of Speech Part a | Prepositions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly. | ||||
| 31 | Punctuation Skills Part b | Quotation Marks | ||
| Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech. | ||||
| 32 | Apostrophe – Possession | Apostrophe – Possession | ||
| Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly. | ||||
| 33 | Mnemonics | Spelling – Mnemonics | ||
| Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling. | ||||
| 34 | Prefixes | Prefixes | ||
| Objective: The identify and use prefixes. | ||||
| 35 | Suffixes | Suffixes | ||
| Objective: The identify and use suffixes. | ||||
| 36 | Similes and Metaphors | Similes and Metaphors | ||
| Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors. | ||||
| 37 | Figurative Language | Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration | ||
| Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration. | ||||
| 38 | Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs | Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs. | ||||
| 39 | Advanced Dictionary Use | Advanced Dictionary Use | ||
| Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus. | ||||
| 40 | Capitalisation | Capital Letters 2 | ||
| Objective: To use capital letters correctly: in titles and letters. | ||||
| 41 | Adjectives | Adjectives – from Nouns and Verbs | ||
| Objective: To create adjectives from nouns and verbs. E.g. China – Chinese | ||||
| 42 | Pronouns | Pronouns 2 | ||
| Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns. | ||||
| 43 | Commas 2 | Commas 2 | ||
| Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech. | ||||
| 44 | Conjunctions – Sentences | Conjunctions – Sentences | ||
| Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression. | ||||
| 45 | Phrases | Phrases | ||
| Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases. | ||||
| 46 | Clauses | Clauses | ||
| Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses. | ||||
| 47 | Simple and Compound Verbs | Simple and Compound Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use simple and compound verbs. | ||||
| 48 | Auxiliary Verbs | Auxiliary Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use auxiliary verbs within compound verbs. | ||||
| 49 | Subject-Verb Agreement | Subject-Verb Agreement | ||
| Objective: To identify and use correct tense, number and person in forming verbs. | ||||
| 50 | Verb tense – Compound | Verb tense – Compound | ||
| Objective: To identify and use ‘to be’ and ‘to have’ with the appropriate participle of the main verb. | ||||
| 51 | Plurals | Plurals 3 – Unusual | ||
| Objective: To create unusual plurals: for words ending in ‘o’; by changing the vowels or by adding letters. | ||||
| 52 | Common Errors | Common Errors in verb usage, spelling and punctuation | ||
| Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors. | ||||
| 53 | Punctuation | Punctuation – Various | ||
| Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly. | ||||
| 54 | Vocabulary Development | Vocabulary | ||
| Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’. | ||||
| 55 | What do you like to do? | Adverbs of frequency | ||
| Objective: Learn about the past continuous tense. | ||||
| 56 | BBQ Party! | Expressions of quantity | ||
| Objective: Learn the words used to express quantity. | ||||
| 57 | BBQ Party! | Sequence markers | ||
| Objective: Learn the words used in sequences or ordering. | ||||
| 58 | Big day out! | First and second conditionals | ||
| Objective: Learn the use of first conditionals. Learn the use of second conditionals. | ||||
| 59 | Big day out! | The future with ‘will’ and ‘going to’ | ||
| Objective: Learn the uses of ‘will’ and ‘going to’ to talk about the future. | ||||
| 60 | Thanks and goodbye | Time clauses | ||
| Objective: Learn how to use time clauses. | ||||
Go to top
Year 7 Literacy
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Have you met? | Hello! | ||
| Objective: Use the present tense verb to be (am, is and are) correctly in written and spoken work. Answer comprehension questions and apply am, is and are correctly. | ||||
| 2 | Have you met? | The world in a classroom! Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: At the end of this lesson, students will have learnt how to ask a question in English, and how to use the definite and indefinite articles. | ||||
| 3 | Let’s get organised! | First week fun! | ||
| Objective: Students will be able to read a schedule of activities, including a number of time expressions, and answer comprehension questions about the information given. | ||||
| 4 | Let’s get organised! | Organising your subject timetable. | ||
| Objective: Students will read scheduling information, correctly name school subjects in English, use information to complete a weekly timetable and answer simple present questions in affirmative and negative. | ||||
| 5 | I like your hat! | We are all different! | ||
| Objective: At the end of the reading students will be able to answer comprehension questions and use the correct pronouns to replace nouns. They will use correct forms to indicate a person, number, gender or ownership. | ||||
| 6 | I like your hat! | Fashion tips from Junko! | ||
| Objective: At the end of the reading students will be able to answer comprehension questions and identify different articles of clothing. They will be able to use descriptive adjectives and possessive adjectives. | ||||
| 7 | Where is it? | Getting around the ILC campus. | ||
| Objective: At the end of the reading students will be able to locate specific places based on descriptions using prepositions of location. | ||||
| 8 | Where is it? | Come to my party! | ||
| Objective: At the end of this lesson students will be able to give and understand simple directions using the imperative mode. | ||||
| 9 | How much is it? | Shopping list. | ||
| Objective: Students will read and answer comprehension questions, recognise count and uncount nouns and be able to use some/any and much/many correctly. | ||||
| 10 | How much is it? | Where can I buy it? | ||
| Objective: Students will read a brochure describing different types of shops. They will be able to answer comprehension questions and recognise and use comparative adjectives. | ||||
| 11 | Tell me what happened! | Eyewitness. | ||
| Objective: Students will read and understand a text talking about a past experience using the simple past tense with regular and irregular verbs, both positive and negative. | ||||
| 12 | Tell me what happened! | She screamed loudly! | ||
| Objective: Students will read and understand a short newspaper article using the past tense. They will answer comprehension questions and practise identifying and using adverbs and expressions of past time. | ||||
| 13 | What’s your favourite? | Would you like to play? | ||
| Objective: At the end of the reading students will be able to elicit information from a written text. They will be able to recognise the use of the infinitive form ‘to + verb’ to express purpose. | ||||
| 14 | What’s your favourite? | Do you enjoy going out? | ||
| Objective: Students will read ads for different leisure activities. They will be able to answer comprehension questions and recognise the use of gerunds. (verb + ing) | ||||
| 15 | May I take your order? | Are you eating well? | ||
| Objective: At the end of the lesson students will be able to answer comprehension questions based on the text and recognise and use the present continuous. | ||||
| 16 | May I take your order? | Would you like some tea? | ||
| Objective: Students will be able to answer comprehension questions and distinguish between ‘like’ and ‘would like. | ||||
| 17 | What will we do? | What will we do there? | ||
| Objective: At the end of the reading students will be able to elicit information from a reading and identify the use of ‘will’ and ‘going to’ to show future plans and hopes. | ||||
| 18 | What will we do? | What kind of job? | ||
| Objective: At the end of this lesson students will be able to answer questions about different jobs and occupations. They will also be able to talk about ongoing future activities using the ‘present continuous’ form and ‘before’, ‘when’, ‘after’ and ‘as soon as’ in future tense. | ||||
| 19 | Let’s celebrate | Merry Christmas! | ||
| Objective: At the end of this lesson students will be able to answer comprehension questions and distinguish between the present perfect and simple past. | ||||
| 20 | Let’s celebrate | The Diwali Festival. | ||
| Objective: At the end of this reading students will be able to describe an event in some detail using the present perfect/past simple and identify the differences between conjunctions ‘and’, ‘but’ and ‘because’. | ||||
| 21 | Sentences | The Sentence | ||
| Objective: To identify and use complete sentences. | ||||
| 22 | Capitalisation | Capital Letters 1 | ||
| Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns. | ||||
| 23 | Punctuation | Sentence Endings | ||
| Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly. | ||||
| 24 | Common Nouns | Common Nouns | ||
| Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing. | ||||
| 25 | Nouns | Proper Nouns | ||
| Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title. | ||||
| 26 | Verbs | Simple Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership. | ||||
| 27 | Adjectives | Adjectives | ||
| Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun. | ||||
| 28 | Adverbs | Adverbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb. | ||||
| 29 | Pronouns | Pronouns | ||
| Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun. | ||||
| 30 | Parts of Speech Part b | Conjunctions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly. | ||||
| 31 | Conjunctions – Sentences | Conjunctions – Sentences | ||
| Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression. | ||||
| 32 | Capitalisation | Capital Letters 2 | ||
| Objective: To use capital letters correctly: in titles and letters. | ||||
| 33 | Parts of Speech Part h | Articles and Demonstratives | ||
| Objective: To identify and use articles and demonstratives correctly. | ||||
| 34 | Antonyms and Synonyms | Antonyms and Synonyms | ||
| Objective: To identify and use antonyms and synonyms. | ||||
| 35 | Punctuation | Commas 1 | ||
| Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date. | ||||
| 36 | Commas 2 | Commas 2 | ||
| Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech. | ||||
| 37 | Spelling Skills | Spelling | ||
| Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’. | ||||
| 38 | Spelling Skills | Syllabification | ||
| Objective: To improve spelling by dividing words correctly into syllables. | ||||
| 39 | Plurals | Plurals 2 – special rules | ||
| Objective: To form plurals with special rules: words ending in ‘y’ and ‘f’. | ||||
| 40 | Nouns | Collective and Abstract Nouns | ||
| Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns. | ||||
| 41 | Verbs | Verbs – Tense | ||
| Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future. | ||||
| 42 | Adjectives | Adjectives – Comparatives and Superlatives | ||
| Objective: To identify and use comparative and superlative adjectives. | ||||
| 43 | Parts of Speech Part a | Prepositions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly. | ||||
| 44 | Punctuation Skills Part b | Quotation Marks | ||
| Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech. | ||||
| 45 | Apostrophe – Possession | Apostrophe – Possession | ||
| Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly. | ||||
| 46 | Mnemonics | Spelling – Mnemonics | ||
| Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling. | ||||
| 47 | Prefixes | Prefixes | ||
| Objective: The identify and use prefixes. | ||||
| 48 | Suffixes | Suffixes | ||
| Objective: The identify and use suffixes. | ||||
| 49 | Similes and Metaphors | Similes and Metaphors | ||
| Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors. | ||||
| 50 | Figurative Language | Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration | ||
| Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration. | ||||
| 51 | Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs | Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs. | ||||
| 52 | Advanced Dictionary Use | Advanced Dictionary Use | ||
| Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus. | ||||
| 53 | Vocabulary Development | Vocabulary | ||
| Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’. | ||||
| 54 | Phrases | Phrases | ||
| Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases. | ||||
| 55 | Clauses | Clauses | ||
| Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses. | ||||
| 56 | Simple and Compound Verbs | Simple and Compound Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use simple and compound verbs. | ||||
| 57 | Auxiliary Verbs | Auxiliary Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use auxiliary verbs within compound verbs. | ||||
| 58 | Subject-Verb Agreement | Subject-Verb Agreement | ||
| Objective: To identify and use correct tense, number and person in forming verbs. | ||||
| 59 | Verb tense – Compound | Verb tense – Compound | ||
| Objective: To identify and use ‘to be’ and ‘to have’ with the appropriate participle of the main verb. | ||||
| 60 | Plurals | Plurals 3 – Unusual | ||
| Objective: To create unusual plurals: for words ending in ‘o’; by changing the vowels or by adding letters. | ||||
Go to top
Year 8 Literacy
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | What’s Homestay? | Want to improve your English? | ||
| Objective: Learn how to elicit information from an advertisement and text. | ||||
| 2 | What’s Homestay? | Homestay application | ||
| Objective: Learn how to fill in an application form. | ||||
| 3 | Setting off | Destination ‘Downunder’ | ||
| Objective: Expand vocabulary, read and understand a travel brochure. | ||||
| 4 | Setting off | A letter to the Carters Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: Read and understand an informal letter of introduction. | ||||
| 5 | Here we are! | Who are the Carters? | ||
| Objective: Elicit information from a letter about people’s physical appearance. | ||||
| 6 | Here we are! | My new family | ||
| Objective: Learn how to elicit information about personality traits from the text. | ||||
| 7 | A new home | This is our house. | ||
| Objective: Read a description of a house using prepositions of location. | ||||
| 8 | A new home | Our room! | ||
| Objective: Read a text using prepositions of location. | ||||
| 9 | Let’s hit the beach! | Meet Tim. He’s a lifesaver. | ||
| Objective: Elicit information to answer questions from the text. Identify strong versus mild obligation. | ||||
| 10 | Let’s hit the beach! | Be safe at the beach this summer! | ||
| Objective: Read and understand a safety pamphlet for Australian beaches. Identify imperatives in the reading. | ||||
| 11 | Amazing Aussie animals | Marsupials | ||
| Objective: Identify factual information within a text, answer questions and recognise a topic sentence. | ||||
| 12 | Amazing Aussie animals | When we were watching … | ||
| Objective: Read postcards about Australian animals. Identify past and present continuous. | ||||
| 13 | What do you like to do? | Would you like to join? | ||
| Objective: Select factual information from a text to answer questions. Identify the different ways to use like, like to and would like to. | ||||
| 14 | What do you like to do? | How often do you …? | ||
| Objective: Use adverbs of frequency and calculate how often activities occur. | ||||
| 15 | BBQ Party! | A famous Aussie dessert | ||
| Objective: Answer comprehension questions and identify expressions of quantity. | ||||
| 16 | BBQ Party! | A new ‘barbie’! | ||
| Objective: Read a set of instructions and complete activities based on comprehension and sequencing details. | ||||
| 17 | Big day out! | The big three Full lesson available |
||
| Objective: Answer comprehension questions and identify first and second conditionals. | ||||
| 18 | Big day out! | The big plan | ||
| Objective: Identify the different uses of ‘going to’. Use different ways of expressing time. | ||||
| 19 | Thanks and goodbye | My Australian experience | ||
| Objective: Read a text and answer comprehension questions. Identify expressions about ‘feelings’. | ||||
| 20 | Thanks and goodbye | Thank you letter | ||
| Objective: Recognise time clauses and identify ‘feeling’ adjectives. | ||||
| 21 | Sentences | The Sentence | ||
| Objective: To identify and use complete sentences. | ||||
| 22 | Punctuation | Sentence Endings | ||
| Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly. | ||||
| 23 | Capitalisation | Capital Letters 2 | ||
| Objective: To use capital letters correctly: in titles and letters. | ||||
| 24 | Pronouns | Pronouns 2 | ||
| Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns. | ||||
| 25 | Parts of Speech Part a | Prepositions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly. | ||||
| 26 | Punctuation Skills Part b | Quotation Marks | ||
| Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech. | ||||
| 27 | Contractions | Contractions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use contractions. | ||||
| 28 | Common Errors | Common Errors in writing | ||
| Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors. | ||||
| 29 | Commas 2 | Commas 2 | ||
| Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech. | ||||
| 30 | Conjunctions – Sentences | Conjunctions – Sentences | ||
| Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression. | ||||
| 31 | Phrases | Phrases | ||
| Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases. | ||||
| 32 | Clauses | Clauses | ||
| Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses. | ||||
| 33 | Subject-Verb Agreement | Subject-Verb Agreement | ||
| Objective: To identify and use correct tense, number and person in forming verbs. | ||||
| 34 | Verb tense – Compound | Verb tense – Compound | ||
| Objective: To identify and use ‘to be’ and ‘to have’ with the appropriate participle of the main verb. | ||||
| 35 | Verbs – Active and Passive voice | Verbs – Active and Passive voice | ||
| Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice. | ||||
| 36 | Apostrophe – Possession | Apostrophe – Possession | ||
| Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly. | ||||
| 37 | Similes and Metaphors | Similes and Metaphors | ||
| Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors. | ||||
| 38 | Figurative Language | Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration | ||
| Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration. | ||||
| 39 | Common Errors | Common Errors in verb usage, spelling and punctuation | ||
| Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors. | ||||
| 40 | Colons and Semi-Colons | Colons and Semi-Colons | ||
| Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly. | ||||
| 41 | Sentence Structure Part a | Subject and Predicate | ||
| Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence. | ||||
| 42 | Regular and Irregular Verbs | Regular and Irregular Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use regular and irregular verbs in the present and past tense. | ||||
| 43 | Verbs – Infinitives | Verbs – Infinitives | ||
| Objective: To identify and use the infinitive form of the verb. | ||||
| 44 | Modal Verbs | Modal Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb. | ||||
| 45 | Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives | Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives | ||
| Objective: To identify and use participles as verbs or adjectives as indicators of continuing action. | ||||
| 46 | Gerunds | Gerunds | ||
| Objective: To identify and use gerunds. | ||||
| 47 | Interjections | Interjections | ||
| Objective: To identify and use interjections correctly. | ||||
| 48 | Plurals | Plurals 4 – Unusual | ||
| Objective: To use nouns whose singular and plural forms are the same. To use compound noun plurals. | ||||
| 49 | Sentence Improvement | Sentence Improvement | ||
| Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses. | ||||
| 50 | Punctuation | Punctuation – Various | ||
| Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly. | ||||
| 51 | Mass and Count Nouns | Determiners | ||
| Objective: To identify and use determiners correctly with mass and count nouns. | ||||
| 52 | Transitive and Intransitive Verbs | Transitive and Intransitive Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs. | ||||
| 53 | Case – Nouns and Pronouns | Case – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives | ||
| Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns. | ||||
| 54 | Plurals of Foreign Nouns | Plurals 5 – Foreign | ||
| Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns. | ||||
| 55 | Variety of Expression | Sentence Construction | ||
| Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning. | ||||
| 56 | Figurative Language | Symbolism and Personification | ||
| Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification. | ||||
| 57 | Review of Figures of Speech | Review of Figures of Speech | ||
| Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing. | ||||
| 58 | Spelling Skills | Word Usage | ||
| Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning. | ||||
| 59 | Essay Writing 1 | Essay Writing 1 | ||
| Objective: To develop and write essays (expositions). | ||||
| 60 | Essay Writing 2 | Essay Writing 2 | ||
| Objective: To develop and write essays. | ||||
Go to top
Year 9-12 Literacy
| # | TOPIC | TITLE | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Sentences | The Sentence | ||
| Objective: To identify and use complete sentences. | ||||
| 2 | Vowels | Vowels – Long and Short | ||
| Objective: To identify long and short vowel sounds, and their use. | ||||
| 3 | Basic Dictionary Use | Basic Dictionary Use | ||
| Objective: To find words arranged alphabetically and identify word meanings in dictionaries. | ||||
| 4 | Capitalisation | Capital Letters 1 | ||
| Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns. | ||||
| 5 | Punctuation | Sentence Endings | ||
| Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly. | ||||
| 6 | Common Nouns | Common Nouns | ||
| Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing. | ||||
| 7 | Nouns | Proper Nouns | ||
| Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title. | ||||
| 8 | Verbs | Simple Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership. | ||||
| 9 | Adjectives | Adjectives | ||
| Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun. | ||||
| 10 | Adverbs | Adverbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb. | ||||
| 11 | Pronouns | Pronouns | ||
| Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun. | ||||
| 12 | Parts of Speech Part b | Conjunctions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly. | ||||
| 13 | Common Errors | Common Errors in spelling and punctuation | ||
| Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors. | ||||
| 14 | Conjunctions – Sentences | Conjunctions – Sentences | ||
| Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression. | ||||
| 15 | Capitalisation | Capital Letters 2 | ||
| Objective: To use capital letters correctly: in titles and letters. | ||||
| 16 | Parts of Speech Part h | Articles and Demonstratives | ||
| Objective: To identify and use articles and demonstratives correctly. | ||||
| 17 | Antonyms and Synonyms | Antonyms and Synonyms | ||
| Objective: To identify and use antonyms and synonyms. | ||||
| 18 | Punctuation | Commas 1 | ||
| Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date. | ||||
| 19 | Commas 2 | Commas 2 | ||
| Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech. | ||||
| 20 | Spelling Skills | Spelling | ||
| Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’. | ||||
| 21 | Spelling Skills | Syllabification | ||
| Objective: To improve spelling by dividing words correctly into syllables. | ||||
| 22 | Plurals | Plurals 1 – simple | ||
| Objective: To form plurals (more than one) by adding ‘s’ and ‘es’ correctly. | ||||
| 23 | Plurals | Plurals 2 – special rules | ||
| Objective: To form plurals with special rules: words ending in ‘y’ and ‘f’. | ||||
| 24 | Nouns | Collective and Abstract Nouns | ||
| Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns. | ||||
| 25 | Verbs | Verbs – Tense | ||
| Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future. | ||||
| 26 | Adjectives | Adjectives – from Nouns and Verbs | ||
| Objective: To create adjectives from nouns and verbs. E.g. China – Chinese | ||||
| 27 | Adjectives | Adjectives – Comparatives and Superlatives | ||
| Objective: To identify and use comparative and superlative adjectives. | ||||
| 28 | Parts of Speech Part a | Prepositions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly. | ||||
| 29 | Punctuation Skills Part b | Quotation Marks | ||
| Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech. | ||||
| 30 | Apostrophe – Possession | Apostrophe – Possession | ||
| Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly. | ||||
| 31 | Mnemonics | Spelling – Mnemonics | ||
| Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling. | ||||
| 32 | Prefixes | Prefixes | ||
| Objective: The identify and use prefixes. | ||||
| 33 | Suffixes | Suffixes | ||
| Objective: The identify and use suffixes. | ||||
| 34 | Similes and Metaphors | Similes and Metaphors | ||
| Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors. | ||||
| 35 | Figurative Language | Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration | ||
| Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration. | ||||
| 36 | Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs | Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs. | ||||
| 37 | Advanced Dictionary Use | Advanced Dictionary Use | ||
| Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus. | ||||
| 38 | Vocabulary Development | Vocabulary | ||
| Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’. | ||||
| 39 | Phrases | Phrases | ||
| Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases. | ||||
| 40 | Clauses | Clauses | ||
| Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses. | ||||
| 41 | Simple and Compound Verbs | Simple and Compound Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use simple and compound verbs. | ||||
| 42 | Auxiliary Verbs | Auxiliary Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use auxiliary verbs within compound verbs. | ||||
| 43 | Subject-Verb Agreement | Subject-Verb Agreement | ||
| Objective: To identify and use correct tense, number and person in forming verbs. | ||||
| 44 | Verb tense – Compound | Verb tense – Compound | ||
| Objective: To identify and use ‘to be’ and ‘to have’ with the appropriate participle of the main verb. | ||||
| 45 | Plurals | Plurals 3 – Unusual | ||
| Objective: To create unusual plurals: for words ending in ‘o’; by changing the vowels or by adding letters. | ||||
| 46 | Pronouns | Pronouns 2 | ||
| Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns. | ||||
| 47 | Contractions | Contractions | ||
| Objective: To identify and use contractions. | ||||
| 48 | Common Errors | Common Errors in writing | ||
| Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors. | ||||
| 49 | Verbs – Active and Passive voice | Verbs – Active and Passive voice | ||
| Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice. | ||||
| 50 | Common Errors | Common Errors in verb usage, spelling and punctuation | ||
| Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors. | ||||
| 51 | Colons and Semi-Colons | Colons and Semi-Colons | ||
| Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly. | ||||
| 52 | Sentence Structure Part a | Subject and Predicate | ||
| Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence. | ||||
| 53 | Regular and Irregular Verbs | Regular and Irregular Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use regular and irregular verbs in the present and past tense. | ||||
| 54 | Verbs – Infinitives | Verbs – Infinitives | ||
| Objective: To identify and use the infinitive form of the verb. | ||||
| 55 | Modal Verbs | Modal Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb. | ||||
| 56 | Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives | Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives | ||
| Objective: To identify and use participles as verbs or adjectives as indicators of continuing action. | ||||
| 57 | Gerunds | Gerunds | ||
| Objective: To identify and use gerunds. | ||||
| 58 | Interjections | Interjections | ||
| Objective: To identify and use interjections correctly. | ||||
| 59 | Plurals | Plurals 4 – Unusual | ||
| Objective: To use nouns whose singular and plural forms are the same. To use compound noun plurals. | ||||
| 60 | Sentence Improvement | Sentence Improvement | ||
| Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses. | ||||
| 61 | Punctuation | Punctuation – Various | ||
| Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly. | ||||
| 62 | Mass and Count Nouns | Determiners | ||
| Objective: To identify and use determiners correctly with mass and count nouns. | ||||
| 63 | Transitive and Intransitive Verbs | Transitive and Intransitive Verbs | ||
| Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs. | ||||
| 64 | Case – Nouns and Pronouns | Case – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives | ||
| Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns. | ||||
| 65 | Plurals of Foreign Nouns | Plurals 5 – Foreign | ||
| Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns. | ||||
| 66 | Variety of Expression | Sentence Construction | ||
| Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning. | ||||
| 67 | Figurative Language | Symbolism and Personification | ||
| Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification. | ||||
| 68 | Review of Figures of Speech | Review of Figures of Speech | ||
| Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing. | ||||
| 69 | Spelling Skills | Word Usage | ||
| Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning. | ||||
| 70 | Essay Writing 1 | Essay Writing 1 | ||
| Objective: To develop and write essays (expositions). | ||||
| 71 | Essay Writing 2 | Essay Writing 2 | ||
| Objective: To develop and write essays. | ||||
| 72 | Letter Writing | Personal and Business Letters | ||
| Objective: To use correct setting out and format for personal and business letters. | ||||
Go to top
